Table of Contents MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual 6GT2 397-4BA00-0EA2 Published in April 2005 General 1 Introduction - MOBY E 2 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3 Mobile Data Memories 4 Read/Write Devices Read/Write Antennas 5 Interfaces 6 Accessories 7 Documentation A Error Messages B ASCII Table C Compatibility D Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger: ! Danger ! Warning ! Caution indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken. indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Note draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a particular part of the documentation. Qualified Personnel The device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this manual. Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits, equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards. Correct Usage ! Note the following: Warning This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens. This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended. Trademarks MOBY, SIMATIC and SINEC are trademarks of SIEMENS AG. Some of the other designations used in these documents are also registered trademarks; the owner's rights may be violated if they are used by third parties for their own purposes. Copyright Siemens AG 1997 All rights reserved Disclaimer of Liability The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed. Siemens AG Automation and Drives Special Products, Projects Automotive Industry, Training P.O. Box 4848, D-90327 Nuernberg Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Siemens AG 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2002, 2003, 2005 Technical data subject to change. Order No. 6GT2 397-4BA00-0EA2 MOBY E Contents 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 2 Introduction to MOBY E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 3 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.1.4 3.1.5 Basic Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit Period of the MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication between ASM and User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sample Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 3-3 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3.2 Field Data of MDS, SLG and SLA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 3.3 Presentation of Speed to Amount of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition of the Metal-Free Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effects of Metal on the Transmission Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduction of Metallic Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chemical Resistance of the Mobile Data Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 3-20 3-28 3-34 3-37 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 3.5.6 3.5.7 3.5.8 3.5.9 EMC Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spreading of Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Avoiding Interference Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipotential Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ground Fault Monitoring with MOBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shielding the Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Rules on EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 3-40 3-41 3-42 3-45 3-48 3-49 3-50 3-51 3-53 3.6 Concept of MOBY Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 3.7.3 3.7.4 Cable and Connector Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58 3-58 3-60 3-64 3-69 Mobile Data Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4.2 MDS E600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 4.3 MDS E611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 4.4 MDS E623 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 4.5 MDS E624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 4 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 i Contents 5 6 7 ii Read/Write Devices Read/Write Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5.2 SLG 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5.3 SLG 75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 5.4 SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC S5 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 6-4 6-9 6-12 6.3 ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 6.4 ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 6.5 ASM 454/424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36 6.6 6.6.1 6.6.2 6.6.3 6.6.4 6.6.5 6.6.6 6.6.7 ASM 456 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the PROFIBUS Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring ASM 456 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnosis using LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42 6-42 6-46 6-49 6-54 6-56 6-57 6-58 6.7 ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59 6.8 ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69 6.9 ASM 724/754 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77 6.10 6.10.1 6.10.2 6.10.3 6.10.4 6.10.5 6.10.6 SIM Serial Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86 Cable and Connector Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92 Programming the SIM Module with the 3964R Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98 SIM 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99 SIM 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104 SIM 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7.1 MOBY Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 7.2 MOBY Wide-Range Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 7.3 Wide-Range Connector Power Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 7.4 MOBY STG E Hand-Held Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 7.5 Acquisition Station ES 030-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Contents A Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 B Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 B.1 General Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 B.2 B.2.1 B.2.2 B.2.3 ASM-specific error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 400 with FB 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 470 with FB 47/FC 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 450 with FB 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7 B-7 B-9 B-11 C ASCII Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 D Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 iii Contents Figures 2-1 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-23 3-24 3-25 3-26 3-27 3-28 3-29 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-33 3-34 3-35 3-36 3-37 3-38 3-39 3-40 3-41 3-42 3-43 3-44 3-45 3-46 3-47 3-48 3-49 3-50 iv Overview of MOBY E components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direction of movement of the MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in static operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in dynamic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tolerances of the side allowance of the pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tolerance of the side allowance of the pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG 75 ANT 1/SLA 71 with MDS E600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG 75 ANT 1/SLA 71 with MDS E611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG 75 ANT 1/SLA 71 with MDS E624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG 75 ANT 4 with MDS E600 (length Lx of the transmission window) . SLG 75 ANT 4 with MDS E611 (length Lx of the transmission window) . . SLG 75 ANT 4 with MDS E624 (length Lx of the transmission window) . SLG 72 with MDS E600 (length Lx of the transmission window) . . . . . . . . SLG 72 with MDS E611 (length Lx of the transmission window) . . . . . . . . SLG 72 with MDS E624 (length Lx of the transmission window) . . . . . . . . Mounting on metal: MDS E600/E611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush mounting: MDS E600/E611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting on metal: MDS E623 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for MDS E623 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting on metal: MDS E624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush mounting in metal (static): MDS E624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush mounting in metal (static): ANT 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting in a metallic environment: SLG 75 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting in a metallic environment: SLG 75 ANT 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting on metal: SLG 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush mounting in metal: SLG 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush mounting in metal: SLG 75 ANT 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush mounting in metal: SLG 75 ANT 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush mounting in metal: SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS in metal-free environment (example: MDS E 611) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The MDS in a metallic environment (example: MDS E611) . . . . . . . . . . . . Interfering metal supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spreading of Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The four kinds of interference coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shielding via housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Avoidance of interference via optimal layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering the supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inductive interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipotential bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit diagram of the principle of ground fault monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC AG 100U with ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shielding of the cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of the shield rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interruption of shielded cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simple layout with ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout of the ASM 470/475 with shield contact element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baring of the cable shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage supply with power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG with extra power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 3-3 3-4 3-4 3-5 3-9 3-10 3-14 3-14 3-15 3-15 3-16 3-16 3-17 3-17 3-18 3-20 3-20 3-21 3-21 3-22 3-22 3-23 3-24 3-24 3-25 3-25 3-26 3-26 3-27 3-32 3-33 3-34 3-35 3-42 3-44 3-45 3-46 3-47 3-48 3-49 3-50 3-50 3-51 3-52 3-52 3-55 3-56 3-56 3-57 3-59 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Contents 3-51 3-52 3-53 3-54 3-55 3-56 3-57 3-58 3-59 3-60 3-61 3-62 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-22 5-23 5-24 MOBY wide-range power pack on the ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing of mounting the SLG connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting cable ASM 400/424/454, ES 030 SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting cable ASM 410 SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting cable ASM 450/452/473 SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting cable ASM 470/475 SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting cable RS 232 PC ASM 424/724 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting cable ASM 724/754 SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extension cable ASM 724/754 SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting cable ASM 456 SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extension cable ASM 456 SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting cable for RS 232 PC SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS E600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS E600 and its mounting bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for MDS E600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS E611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of MDS E611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of the spacer and mounting bracket for the MDS E611 (for use with the MDS E600, see note in Figure 4-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for MDS E611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS E623 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting on metal: MDS E623 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for MDS E623 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions and installation space for MDS E623 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of mounting the MDS E623 in a quick-release taper shaft . . . . . Example of mounting the MDS E623 in a retention shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS E624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of MDS E624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for MDS E624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read/write device SLG 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of the SLG 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space of SLG 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: SLG 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawing SLG 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read/write device SLG 75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANT 1 for SLG 75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANT 4 for SLG 75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANT 12 for the SLG 75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANT 18 for the SLG 75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANT 30 for the SLG 75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of the ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of the ANT 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of the ANT 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of the ANT 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of the ANT 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for the ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for the ANT 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for the ANT 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for the ANT 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for the ANT 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: ANT 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: ANT 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-59 3-63 3-64 3-64 3-65 3-65 3-66 3-66 3-67 3-67 3-67 3-68 4-4 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-14 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19 5-3 5-5 5-5 5-6 5-6 5-7 5-7 5-8 5-8 5-9 5-9 5-13 5-13 5-14 5-14 5-14 5-15 5-15 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-18 5-18 5-18 v Contents 5-25 5-26 5-27 5-28 5-29 5-30 5-31 5-32 5-33 5-34 5-35 5-36 5-37 5-38 5-39 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-26 6-27 6-28 6-29 6-30 6-31 6-32 6-33 6-34 6-35 6-36 6-37 vi Distance D: ANT 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: ANT 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawing of SLG 75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawing of the ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawing of the ANT 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawing of the ANT 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawing of the ANT 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawing of the ANT 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 450 connecting cables with split toroidal cores (example) . . . . . . . . Antenna line with round cores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read/write antenna SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of the SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawing of SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator of ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors and their assignment for the ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switches and plug-in jumpers for the ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings on the channel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module rack CR 700-0LA (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module rack CR 700-0LB (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module rack CR 700-1 (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module rack CR 700-2 (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module rack CR 700-3 (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module rack ER 701-3 (S5-115U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Central controller S5-135U/ -155U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Central controller S5-155U/-155H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion unit EG S5-183U for S5-135U/-155U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion unit EG S5-184U for S5-135U/-155U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion unit EG S5-185U for S5-135U/-155U/-155H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion unit EG S5-187U for S5-135U/-155U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator for ASM 410 in SIMATIC S5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator for ASM 410 in ET 100U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 410 interface with operational and indicator elements . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring of one or two SLGs for ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 450/452 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator for ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector ASM 450/452/473 SLG (6GT2 090-0BC00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting cable ASM 450/452/473 SLG (6GT2 091-1CH20) . . . . . . PROFIBUS cable with 24 V supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SLG and DI/DO configuration for ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawing of the ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin assignment and LEDs of the ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Length of baring for a PROFIBUS cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the PROFIBUS address and circuiting the terminating resistance ASM 454/424 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator for the ASM 454/424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interfaces of the ASM 454/424 to the SLG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interfaces of the ASM 454/424 to the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawing of the ASM 454/424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to mount the adapter plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface module ASM 456 with M12, 7/8" or ECOFAST connection block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 5-19 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-22 5-23 5-24 5-26 5-26 5-27 5-27 6-5 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-13 6-13 6-13 6-14 6-14 6-14 6-15 6-15 6-15 6-16 6-20 6-21 6-24 6-25 6-29 6-30 6-30 6-31 6-32 6-32 6-33 6-35 6-35 6-36 6-39 6-40 6-40 6-41 6-41 6-42 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Contents 6-38 6-39 6-40 6-41 6-42 6-43 6-44 6-45 6-46 6-47 6-48 6-49 6-50 6-51 6-52 6-53 6-54 6-55 6-56 6-57 6-58 6-59 6-60 6-61 6-62 6-63 6-64 6-65 6-66 6-67 6-68 6-69 6-70 6-71 6-72 6-73 6-74 6-75 6-76 6-77 6-78 6-79 6-80 6-81 6-82 6-83 6-84 6-85 6-86 6-87 6-88 7-1 7-2 Basic design of the ASM 456 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator ASM 456 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting PROFIBUS addresses on connection block M12, 7/8" . . . . . . . . . Loosening the configuration plug's screw connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting PROFIBUS address on configuration plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the ASM 456 up to protective earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting cable ASM 456 SLG; l = 2 m, 5 m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extension cable ASM 456 SLG; l = 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 50 m . . . . . LEDs of the ASM 456 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensional drawing of ASM 456 (in mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 470/475 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator for the ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front plate and inside of the front door of the ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring from the ASM 470/475 to the SLG (6GT2 091-0E...) . . . . . . . . . . . Baring of the cable shield for a cable made by the customer . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 470/475 directory in the hardware catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASM 473 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator for the ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum configuration of the ASM 473 on one ET 200X . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin assignment and LEDs of the ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions for mounting holes for basic and expansion modules . . . . . . ASM 724/754 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator for the ASM 724 and ASM 754 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interfaces of the ASM 724/754 to the SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serial interfaces of the ASM 724/754 to the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawing of the ASM 724/754 with mounting holes . . . . . . . . How to mount the adapter plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator for SIM (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data structure of the MOBY E MDS (MIFARE) with SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of the ASM addressing to the block structure of the MDS . . Installation with one connecting cable for rugged environments . . . . . . . . Installation with several connecting cable on the SIM connector . . . . . . . Installation with test cable and plug-in power supply (see Section 3.7.3) Standard cabling for PC/SIM, RS 232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard cabling for PC/SIM, RS 422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DI/DO cabling with power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIM 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: SIM 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawing of the SIM 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of the SIM 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for the SIM 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIM 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of the SIM 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space for SIM 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: SIM 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawing of the SIM 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIM 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission window of the SIM 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal-free space of the SIM 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance D: SIM 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioned drawing of the SIM 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY wide-range power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector pin assignment 24 V output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-44 6-45 6-47 6-48 6-48 6-51 6-52 6-52 6-54 6-57 6-59 6-60 6-64 6-66 6-66 6-67 6-69 6-72 6-74 6-75 6-76 6-77 6-78 6-83 6-84 6-85 6-85 6-87 6-88 6-89 6-93 6-93 6-94 6-96 6-96 6-97 6-99 6-102 6-102 6-103 6-103 6-104 6-106 6-107 6-108 6-108 6-109 6-111 6-112 6-113 6-113 7-5 7-6 vii Contents 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 viii Dimensions of the MOBY wide-range power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY STG E hand-held terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware of the STG E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configurator of ES 030-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration example ES 030-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 7-10 7-12 7-16 7-20 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Contents Tables 2-1 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-22 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 Technical data of MOBY E (field components) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time constants K and tbyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of all MDSs, SLGs and SLAs without metal effects . . . . . . . . . Minimum distance from MDS to MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum distance from SLG/SLA to SLG/SLA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduction in field data due to metal (in %): MDS and SIM 70 with ANT 0 and SLG 75 with ANT 18/ANT 30 . . . . . . . . Reduction in field data due to metal (in %): MDS and SIM 70/SLG 75 with ANT 1 and SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduction in field data due to metal (in %): MDS and SLG 75 with ANT 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduction in field data due to metal (in %): MDS and SLG 75 with ANT 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduction in field data due to metal (in %): MDS and SLG 72/SIM 72 . . Chemical resistance of the MDS E600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chemical resistance of data memories made of fiber glass reinforced epoxy resin (MDS E611/E623/E624) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sources of interference: origins and effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Causes of coupling paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector assignment of the SLG connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector assignment of the 9-pin subminiature D connector . . . . . . . . . Connector assignment of SLA connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector assignment of the 9-pin subminiature D connector . . . . . . . . . Connector assignment for 4-pin power supply connector (pin on the side of the housing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the power supply connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the SLG connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MOBY cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operational requirements/environmental requirements of MDS . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MDS E600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the MDS E600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of MDS E600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MDS E611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the MDS E611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of MDS E611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MDS E623 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the MDS E623 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data MDS E623 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions of MDS E623/installation space in accordance with DIN 69873 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MDS E624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the MDS E624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of MDS E624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview table of SLG/SLA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the SLG 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the SLG 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of SLG 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the SLG 75 and ANT xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the SLG 75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 2-1 3-7 3-11 3-13 3-13 3-28 3-29 3-30 3-30 3-31 3-37 3-38 3-43 3-44 3-58 3-60 3-60 3-61 3-61 3-62 3-62 3-63 3-69 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-4 4-5 4-8 4-8 4-9 4-12 4-12 4-13 4-15 4-17 4-17 4-18 5-2 5-3 5-3 5-4 5-9 5-10 ix Contents 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-26 6-27 6-28 6-29 6-30 6-31 6-32 6-33 6-34 6-35 6-36 6-37 6-38 6-39 6-40 6-41 6-42 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 x Technical data of the antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable specification of the ANT 12 antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of the SLG 75 with antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard connecting cables which will take split toroidal cores . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of SLA 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the ASM 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address settings for ASM 400 with FB 250/252 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status and error LEDs of ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating modes for ASM 410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the ASM 450/452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs for PROFIBUS diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the ASM 454/424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the ASM 454/424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection assignment for ECOFAST connector plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection assignment for M12 connector (PROFIBUS DP) . . . . . . . . . . Connection assignment for 7/8" connector (supply voltages) . . . . . . . . . . Pin assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status LEDs for ASM 456 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED display for PROFIBUS diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of ASM 456 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data of ASM 456 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function of the LEDs on the ASM 470/475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating states shown by LEDs on the ASM 475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite for operation of the ASM 473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the ASM 724/754 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the ASM 724/754 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field data of all MDSs and SIMs without the influence of metal . . . . . . . . Minimum distance from MDS to MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum distance from SIM to SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the SIM connector allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage supply of SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable configuration SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for SIM 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the SIM 70 ANT 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for SIM 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the SIM 70 ANT 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the SIM 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the SIM 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for MOBY software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the MOBY wide-range power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the MOBY wide-range power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the wide-range connector power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 5-12 5-12 5-22 5-24 5-24 5-25 6-2 6-6 6-7 6-10 6-17 6-18 6-22 6-23 6-26 6-27 6-34 6-37 6-38 6-49 6-50 6-50 6-53 6-54 6-55 6-56 6-58 6-61 6-62 6-65 6-65 6-70 6-70 6-73 6-79 6-80 6-90 6-90 6-91 6-92 6-95 6-95 6-99 6-99 6-104 6-104 6-109 6-109 7-4 7-5 7-5 7-8 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Contents 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-9 B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4 D-1 Ordering data for the wide-range, plug-in power pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the STG E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the STG E hand-held terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering data for the ES 030-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the ES 030-K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error messages of FB 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error messages of FB 47/FC 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error messages of FB 240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compatibility of MOBY E components (as at July 2003) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 7-9 7-13 7-13 7-17 7-18 B-3 B-7 B-9 B-11 D-1 xi Contents xii MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 1 General This configuration, installation and service manual will help you to plan and configure your MOBY E system. It covers the guidelines on configuration and installation and provides complete technical data on the individual components. Technical support The specialists of Technical Support are ready to advise and support you when you have questions on the functions and handling of our MOBY products. You can reach us around the clock anywhere in the world. Telephone: Fax: E-mail: Internet +49 (0) 180 5050-222 +49 (0) 180 5050-223 adsupport@siemens.com General news on MOBY E or an overview of our other identification systems are available on the Internet under the following address. http://www.siemens.de/moby MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 1-1 General 1-2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 2 Introduction to MOBY E MOBY E is an RF identification system with low-cost EEPROM data storage for optimization of material handling and production processes for the lowend and medium-range performance level. This powerful system offers highspeed data transmission between data memories (i.e. MDSs) and read/write devices (i.e. SLGs). Principal application areas MOBY E is primarily used when object identification must be inductive (i.e. without contact), reliable and fast and production and manufacturing parameters must be carried on the object. Storage, logistics, and distribution Merchandise distribution Product identification Container identification Assembly lines Tool identification Technical data of MOBY E Table 2-1 Technical data of MOBY E (field components) Storage capacity 752 bytes for use as desired Memory type EEPROM Data organization Address-oriented Protection rating IP65 to IP68 Operating temperature -25 to +125C Data transmission speed (SLG MDS) 2.55 ms/byte for reading 2.8 ms/byte for writing Read/write distance 0 to 100 mm Can be connected to SIMATIC S 5/S7, PCs, computers, PLCs of other manufacturers, and PROFIBUS MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 2-1 Introduction to MOBY E Overview of MOBY E components MDS: Mobile data memory SLA: Read/write antenna SLG: Read/write device SIM: Serial Interface Module ASM: Interface module Service and test device PC SIMs can be operated directly on a serial interface RS 232 / RS 422 ASM 400 for SIMATIC 115U 135U 155U/H with FB 250/230 ASM 410 for SIMATIC 90U 95U 100U/H ET 100 ET 200 ASM 456 ASM 450/452 ASM 424 for to connect for to PROFIBUS DP/ PROFIBUS DPV1 connection PC DPV1 connection with FB/FC 45 with FB/FC for External for SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC S5/S7 PLC SINUMERIK computer via serial Interface ASM 454 for PROFIBUS DPV1 connection with FC 45 for SIMATIC S7 ASM 470/475 for SIMATIC S7-300 with FC 47/FC 45 ET 200M with FB 47/FC 47 ASM 473 Connectable to ET 200X; control via PROFIBUS DPV1 with FC 45 ASM 724 to connect to PC External PLC SINUMERIK computer via serial Interface ASM 754 for PROFIBUS DPV1 connection with FC 45 for SIMATIC S7 X1 X2 Internal system interface/max. cable length of 1,000 m SLG 75 ANT 12 SLG 75 ANT 18 SLG 75 ANT 30 SLG 75 ANT 1 SLG 75 ANT 4 SLG 72 Max. of 55 m SLA 71 SIM 72 SIM 70 ANT 0 SIM 70 ANT 1 Inductive power/data transmission (13.56 MHz) SIEMENS SIEMENS MOBY E MDS E600 MOBY E MDS E611 MDS E600 752 Byte EEPROM ISO-Card MDS E611 752 Byte EEPROM EPOXY-Card MOBY E MDS E623 752 Byte EEPROM Pill Figure 2-1 2-2 MDS E624 752 Byte EEPROM Button Overview of MOBY E components MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3 3-1 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1 Basic Requirements ! Warning Do not make changes to the devices. Violation will invalidate interference emission certification (BZT, FCC), CE and the manufacturer's warranty. To choose the correct MOBY E components, apply the following criteria to your particular application. Transmission distance (i.e. read/write distance) The amount of data to be transferred Metal-free spaces for MDS and SLG/SLA Static of dynamic transmission of the data Speed for dynamic transmission Tolerances of the tracking Environmental conditions (e.g., moisture, temperature, chemical effects, and so on) Maximum write frequency per MDS 3-2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1.1 Transmission Window The read/write device (i.e. SLG/SLA) generates an inductive alternating field. The field is strongest in the vicinity of the SLG/SLA and decreases in strength the further away from the SLG/SLA it moves. Distribution of the field depends on the layout and geometry of the antennas on the SLG/SLA and the MDS. MDS functionality requires a minimum field strength on the MDS achieved at a distance of Sg from the SLG/SLA. The figure below shows the transmission window between the MDS and the SLG/SLA. Ld Transmission window SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSS SSSSSS SSSS SSSSSS SSSS SSSSSS SSSS SSSSSS SSSS Sa Sg MDS ANT 1 View of the side SP MDS L (Sa,max) = Ld L (Sa,min) = Lmax View of the top Sa: Working distance between the MDS and SLG/SLA Sg: Limit distance (The limit distance is the maximum clearance between the top of the SLG/SLA and the top of the MDS at which the transmission will still function under normal conditions.) L: Length of a transmission window. The length Ld is valid for the calculation. In the case of Sa, min, the field length increases from Ld to Lmax. PI: Point of intersection of the symmetry axes of the MDS Figure 3-1 Transmission window The active field to the MDS is a circle. See view from top. The MDS can be processed as soon as the point of intersection (IP) of the MDS enters the circle of the transmission window. If an MDS E600 or E611 enters the transmission window diagonally (hatched portion in Figure 3-1), the length of the field is reduced by approx. 15 percent. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-3 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines The above figure also shows that operation in the area between Sa and Sg is possible. The greater the distance, the smaller the active working area becomes until it is reduced to one point at distance Sg. For this reason, only static operation should be used in the area between Sa and Sg. Direction of movement of the MDS SSSSS IIII SSSSS IIII SSSSS IIII SSSSS IIII SSSSS The MDS and the SLG/SLA do not have a polarization axis (i.e. the MDS can come from any direction, assume any position and traverse the transmission window). The active area is shown below (i.e. for vertical, horizontal and diagonal operation). L SSSSSS IIII SSSSSS IIII SSSSSS IIII SSSSSS IIII SSSSSS W or W Figure 3-2 or W SSSSS III SSSSS III SSSSS III SSSSS III SSSSS L L Direction of movement of the MDS Working in static operation When static operation is used, the MDS can be processed into the area of the limit distance (i.e. Sg). The MDS must be positioned exactly over the SLG/ SLA as shown below. SSSSS SSSSS SSSSS SSSSS SSSSS MDS Transmission window Sg ANT 1 Figure 3-3 3-4 Working in static operation MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Working in dynamic operation Transmission window SSSSSS SSSSSS SSSSS SSSSSS SSSSS SSSSSS SSSSS SSSSSS SSSSS SSSSSS SSSSS SP MDS View of the top SP MDS Figure 3-4 Width of the transmission window Working in dynamic operation The following approximation formula applies to practical applications: B 0, 4 L W: Width of the transmission window L: Length of the transmission window The width of the transmission window (W) is particularly important for the tolerance of mechanical tracking. When W is maintained, the formula can be used without restriction for the transmit period. Transmission window with secondary fields There are generally secondary fields in the range from 0 to 20 mm. However, they should only be considered for configuration in exceptional cases because the write/read intervals are only very limited. Exact details on the field geometry of the secondary fields cannot be provided because the values very much depend on the working distance and the application. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-5 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1.2 Transmit Period of the MDS The transmit period is the time during which the MDS is located in the transmission window of an SLG/SLA. During this time, the SLG/SLA can exchange data with the MDS. The formula used to calculate the transmit period is shown below. tV L 0, 8 [m] V MDS ms tV : Transmit period of the MDS L: Length of the transmission window VMDS: Speed of the data memory in dynamic operation 0.8: Constant factor. Compensates for temperature influences and production tolerances. During static operation, the transmit period can be any length of time. The transmit period must last at least as long as necessary to conclude communication with the MDS. During dynamic operation, the transmit period is determined by the system environment. The amount of data to be transferred must be adjusted to the transmit period or vice versa. General formula: t V tK 3-6 tV : Transmit period of the data memory in the field of the SLG/SLA tK: Communication time between MDS and ASM MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1.3 Communication between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS Communication between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS is asynchronous with a transmission speed of 19200 baud. General formula: t K Kt Byte n Calculation of the maximum amount of user data: t K n max Vt Byte tK: Communication time between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS tV : Transmit period n: Amount of user data in bytes To achieve optimal performance, "n" may not be set to more than 160. nmax: Maximum amount of user data in bytes during dynamic operation tByte: Transmission time for 1 byte (see Table 3-1) K: Constant. The constant represents an internal system time. It contains the time required for power buildup on the MDS and the time required for command transmission (see Table 3-1). Table 3-1 Time constants K and tbyte K [ms] tbyte b t [ms] Operating Mode 35 2.55 Read; Normal operation 51 2.8 Write; Normal operation 20 - Read ID number (4 bytes) This table applies to all commands. When a user command consists of several subcommands, the formula for tK must be applied to each subcommand. The tK calculation applies to interference-free transmission. When transmission is briefly interrupted due to external interference, the ASM continues the command automatically. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-7 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1.4 Communication between ASM and User Program The time required for communication between ASM and user depends on the following factors. Cycle time, token rotation time and type of programmable controller Software used (FB 41, FB 47, FC 44, FC 45, FC 47, FB 240, FB 250) Communication between the ASM 400 and the user can be divided into three steps. a) The user issues a command and starts it. When the FB is called the next time, the command is transferred to the ASM and is acknowledged by the ASM. b) The ASM executes the command with the MDS. The user and the FB are in wait status. Data communication with the MDS starts as soon as an MDS enters the transmission window of the SLG/SLA. The MDS data are stored intermediately on the ASM and checked for correctness. c) Communication of the ASM with the MDS has been concluded. When the FB is called the next time, the read data or the results of a write command are transferred from the ASM to the user. The user receives a finished message. See applicable documentation for the exact communication times between ASM and user. 3-8 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.1.5 Sample Calculation Customer application A transport system moves the pallets with the MDS at a maximum speed of VMDS = 0.75 m/s. The following MOBY E components were selected. ASM 400 (with FB 250) SLG 75 ANT 1 MDS E600 Task: a) Physical specifications are to be provided to the constructor of the plant. b) The maximum number of bytes in dynamic operation is to be provided to the programmer. For technical data of the components, see the tables in Section 3.2 ("field data of MDS, SLG and SLA"). Tolerance of the height allowance of the pallet Direction of movement MDS H 0 < H < Sa 0 < H < 50 mm SLG (View of the side) Figure 3-5 Tolerances of the side allowance of the pallet MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-9 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Tolerances of the side allowance of the pallet MDS Direction of movement of the MDS Middle line of the MDS and SLG ANT 1 Tolerance range of the side allowance W = Width of the transmission window in dynamic operation W Figure 3-6 Tolerance of the side allowance of the pallet Minimum distance between SLG/SLA and SLG/SLA See Table 3-4 for this value. Minimum distance between MDS and MDS See Table 3-3 for this value. Maximum number of bytes tv L * 0, 8 0, 06 m * 0, 8 0, 064 s 64 ms V MDS 0, 75 ms For normal operating mode, see Table 3-1 for the values of K and tbyte. Calculation of nmax Read: tv K 64 ms 35 ms 11, 37 t Byte 2, 55 ms n max 11 Byte Write: tv K 64 ms 51 ms 4, 64 t Byte 2, 8 ms n max 4 Byte Up to 11 bytes can be read or 4 bytes can be written when the MDS passes by. 3-10 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.2 Field Data of MDS, SLG and SLA The table below shows the field data of all MOBY E MDS, SLG and SLA components. This makes selecting an MDS and an SLG/SLA particularly easy. All technical data are typical data, based on an ambient room temperature of 0 to +50 C, a supply voltage of 22 to 27 V DC, and metal-free surroundings. Tolerances of +20 % are permitted for production conditions and temperature fluctuations. Additional tolerances apply to the field data when the total voltage range from 20 V to 30 V DC is utilized for the SLG/SLA, and/or the entire temperature range is utilized for MDS and SLG/SLA. Table 3-2 Field data of all MDSs, SLGs and SLAs without metal effects MDS MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E6233 MDS E624 SLG/SLA Length of the transmission window in mm (L) SLA 71 (Ld) 605 805 --- 38 SLG 72 (Lx)2 (Ly)2 755 505 905 605 --- 60 40 SLG 75 ANT 1 (Ld) 605 805 --- 38 SLG 75 ANT 4 (Ld) 220 250 --- 200 SLG 75 ANT 12 (Ld) --- --- 8 --- SLG 75 ANT 18 (Ld) --- --- 4 12 SLG 75 ANT 30 (Ld) --- --- --- 14 Width of the transmission window in mm (W) 24 32 --- 15 (38)1 30 20 36 24 --- 24 16 SLG 75 ANT 1 24 32 --- 15 (38)1 SLG 75 ANT 4 30 36 --- 24 SLG 75 ANT 12 --- --- 4 --- SLG 75 ANT 18 --- --- 24 5 (12)1 SLG 75 ANT 30 --- --- --- 7 SLA 71 SLG 72 (Wx)2 (Wy)2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-11 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Table 3-2 Field data of all MDSs, SLGs and SLAs without metal effects MDS MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E6233 MDS E624 SLG/SLA Working distance in mm (Sa) SLA 71 0 to 50 10 to 70 --- 0 to 25 SLG 72 0 to 50 10 to 70 --- 0 to 30 SLG 75 ANT 1 0 to 50 10 to 70 --- 0 to 25 SLG 75 ANT 4 0 to 50 10 to 70 --- 0 to 25 SLG 75 ANT 12 --- --- 0 to 4 --- SLG 75 ANT 18 --- --- 0 to 6 0 to 8 SLG 75 ANT 30 --- --- --- 0 to 18 Limit distance in mm (Sg) SLA 71 70 100 --- 40 SLG 72 70 100 --- 40 SLG 75 ANT 1 70 100 --- 40 SLG 75 ANT 4 70 100 --- 35 SLG 75 ANT 12 --- --- 5 --- SLG 75 ANT 18 --- --- 6 15 SLG 75 ANT 30 --- --- --- 24 1 The width (W) contained in parentheses only applies to static MDS operation. 2 For the field geometry, see also Figure 5-2. 3 4 5 MDS E623 together with SIM 75 ANT 12 only in static operation. A maximum average deviation of 2 mm (without affecting the field data) is permitted in static operation. Reduction by approx. 15 % when the MDS enters the transmission window diagonally. See also Figure 3-1. 3-12 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Table 3-3 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E623 MDS E624 SLA 71 > 400 mm > 400 mm --- > 250 mm SLG 72 > 400 mm > 400 mm --- > 250 mm SLG 75 ANT 1 > 400 mm > 400 mm --- > 250 mm SLG 75 ANT 4 > 400 mm > 400 mm --- > 250 mm SLG 75 ANT 12 --- --- > 20 mm --- SLG 75 ANT 18 --- --- > 30 mm > 50 mm SLG 75 ANT 30 --- --- --- > 60 mm Table 3-4 Minimum distance from SLG/SLA to SLG/SLA SLA 71 SLG 72 SLG 75 ANT 1 SLG 75 ANT 4 SLG 75 ANT 12 SLG 75 ANT 18 SLG 75 ANT 30 SLA 71 > 800 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm --- > 400 mm > 400 mm SLG 72 > 800 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm --- > 400 mm > 400 mm SLG 75 ANT 1 > 800 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm --- > 400 mm > 400 mm SLG 75 ANT 4 > 800 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm --- > 400 mm > 400 mm SLG 75 ANT 12 --- --- --- --- > 80 mm > 125 mm --- SLG 75 ANT 18 > 400 mm > 400 mm > 400 mm > 400 mm > 125 mm > 125 mm > 200 mm SLG 75 ANT 30 > 400 mm > 400 mm > 400 mm > 400 mm --- > 200 mm > 200 mm Note Adherence to the values specified in Table 3-4 is essential. There is a danger of the influence of inductive fields if the values are underranged. This would increase the time for data transmission incalculably or a command would be terminated with errors. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-13 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.3 Presentation of Speed to Amount of Data The curves shown here will simplify selection of MOBY E MDS and SLG components for dynamic operation. Information from the table in Section 3.1.3 was used to calculate the curves. The curves apply to vertical operation with a single length of the transmission window (Ld). V MDS (m/s) (m/min) 1.83 110 1.67 100 1.5 90 1.33 80 1.17 70 1 60 0.83 50 0.67 40 0.5 30 0.33 20 0.16 10 Write MDS E600 Read MDS E600 0 0 Figure 3-7 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Number of bytes (n) SLG 75 ANT 1/SLA 71 with MDS E600 V MDS (m/s) (m/min) 1.83 110 1.67 100 1.5 90 1.33 80 1.17 70 1 60 0.83 50 0.67 40 0.5 30 0.33 20 0.16 10 Write MDS E611 Read MDS E611 0 0 Figure 3-8 3-14 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 Number of bytes (n) SLG 75 ANT 1/SLA 71 with MDS E611 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines V MDS (m/s) (m/min) 1.83 110 1.67 100 1.5 90 1.33 80 1.17 70 1 60 0.83 50 0.67 40 0.5 30 0.33 20 0.16 10 Write MDS E624 Read MDS E624 0 0 Figure 3-9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Number of bytes (n) SLG 75 ANT 1/SLA 71 with MDS E624 V MDS (m/s) (m/min) 5.5 330 5.0 300 4.5 270 4.0 240 3.5 210 3.0 180 2.5 150 2.0 120 1.5 1.0 90 0.5 30 Write MDS E600 Read MDS E600 60 0 0 Figure 3-10 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Number of bytes (n) SLG 75 ANT 4 with MDS E600 (length Lx of the transmission window) MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-15 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines V MDS (m/s) (m/min) 5.5 330 5.0 300 4.5 270 4.0 240 3.5 210 3.0 180 2.5 150 2.0 120 1.5 1.0 90 0.5 30 Write MDS E611 Read MDS E611 60 0 0 Figure 3-11 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 Number of bytes (n) SLG 75 ANT 4 with MDS E611 (length Lx of the transmission window) V MDS (m/s) (m/min) 5.5 330 5.0 300 4.5 270 4.0 240 3.5 210 3.0 180 2.5 150 2.0 120 1.5 1.0 90 0.5 30 Write MDS E624 Read MDS E624 60 0 0 Figure 3-12 3-16 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Number of bytes (n) SLG 75 ANT 4 with MDS E624 (length Lx of the transmission window) MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines V MDS (m/s) (m/min) 1.83 110 1.67 100 1.5 90 1.33 80 1.17 70 1 60 0.83 50 0.67 40 0.5 30 0.33 20 0.16 10 Write MDS E600 Read MDS E600 0 0 Figure 3-13 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Number of bytes (n) SLG 72 with MDS E600 (length Lx of the transmission window) V MDS (m/s) (m/min) 1.83 110 1.67 100 1.5 90 1.33 80 1.17 70 1 60 0.83 50 0.67 40 0.5 30 0.33 20 0.16 10 Write MDS E611 Read MDS E611 0 0 Figure 3-14 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 Number of bytes (n) SLG 72 with MDS E611 (length Lx of the transmission window) MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-17 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines V MDS (m/s) (m/min) 1.83 110 1.67 100 1.5 90 1.33 80 1.17 70 1 60 0.83 50 0.67 40 0.5 30 0.33 20 0.16 10 Write MDS E624 Read MDS E624 0 0 Figure 3-15 3-18 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Number of bytes (n) SLG 72 with MDS E624 (length Lx of the transmission window) MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.4 Installation Guidelines The MDS, SLG and SLA are devices which work with induction. Every type of metal, particularly iron and ferromagnetic materials, in the vicinity of these devices influences their field geometry. To ensure that the field data described in Section 3.2 retain their validity, several points must be adhered to when configuring and installing the devices. Minimum distance between two read/write devices or read/write antennas. (See Table 3-4 and Chapter 5) Minimum distance between two adjacent data memories. (See Table 3-3 and Chapter 4) Metal-free area with flush installation of SLG/SLA and MDS in metal Installation of several SLGs/SLAs in metal frames or supports The next few chapters describe how installation in metallic surroundings affects the identification system. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-19 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.4.1 Definition of the Metal-Free Area Metal-free space for MDS Do not mount the MDS directly on metal (exception: MDS E623). Mounting the MDS directly on metal will interrupt all its functions. The following figures show the minimum distance of the MDS to metal. Metal Data memory Non-metal h 20 mm Figure 3-16 Mounting on metal: MDS E600/E611 b Data memory a h Metal Non-metal Standard values: Figure 3-17 3-20 a 20 mm b 20 mm h 20 mm Flush mounting: MDS E600/E611 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Mounting on metal Data memory Metal SIEMENS 6GT2 300-0CD00 MDS E623 MDS E623 can be mounted directly on metal. Figure 3-18 Mounting on metal: MDS E623 Flush mounting in metal Data memory Metal SIEMENS 6GT2 300-0CD00 MDS E623 MDS E623 can be mounted flush in metal. Figure 3-19 Metal-free space for MDS E623 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-21 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Data memory Metal SIEMENS 6GT2 300-0CE00 Non-metal MDS E624 MOBY E h 20 mm Figure 3-20 Mounting on metal: MDS E624 Data memory Metal SIEMENS a 20 mm 6GT2 300-0CE00 Non-metal MDS E624 MOBY E h 20 mm Figure 3-21 Flush mounting in metal (static): MDS E624 Underranging the standard values (i.e. a, b and h) will reduce the field data considerably. The MDS may be mounted with metal screws (i.e. M4 countersunk screws). This has no substantial effect on the range. 3-22 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Metal-free space for SLG/SLA When mounting the SLG/SLA, remember that metal in the vicinity of the antennas may affect the field data. Typical distances to metal are shown in the drawings below. SLG 75 ANT 18 The cylindrical ANT 18 antenna can be mounted in metal with a minimum distance of 10 mm as shown in the following drawing. The field data are not affected. 10 10 ANT 18 Figure 3-22 Flush mounting in metal (static): ANT 18 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-23 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines SLG 75 ANT 1, SLG 75 ANT 4 SLG ANT 1 20 The ANT 1 resp. ANT 4 antenna can be mounted as shown in the following drawings. Remember that the field size may be reduced. (see Section 3.4.2) Metal Metal Non-metal SLG ANT 1 Metal Metal SLG ANT 1 Metal 20 40 Metal Non-metal Figure 3-23 Mounting in a metallic environment: SLG 75 ANT 1 SLG ANT 4 Metal Metal SLG 40 ANT 4 Metal Metal Figure 3-24 3-24 Mounting in a metallic environment: SLG 75 ANT 4 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines SLG 72 Since the height of the housing of the SLG 72 with integrated antenna provides a sufficient distance to the metallic base, the device can be mounted directly on metal. When flush mounting is used, remember to maintain the specified distance to metal on the sides. Metal h h = Physical height of the SLG = 40 mm Figure 3-25 Mounting on metal: SLG 72 b b a a Metal a, b = Metal-free distances = 40 mm Figure 3-26 Flush mounting in metal: SLG 72 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-25 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines SLG 75 ANT 12 With the SLG 75 with ANT 12, the antenna can be mounted flush in metal. This reduces the working and limit distance (see Section 3.4.2) ANT 12 Figure 3-27 SLG 75 ANT 30 Flush mounting in metal: SLG 75 ANT 12 With the SLG 75 with ANT 30, the antenna can be mounted flush in metal. A distance of 20 mm must be maintained to the front of the antenna. This reduces the field data (see Section 3.4.2) 20 20 ANT 30 Figure 3-28 3-26 Flush mounting in metal: SLG 75 ANT 30 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines SLA 71 The SLA 71 can be mounted flush in metal. Remember that the field data may be reduced (see Section 3.4.2) Metal-free area for flush mounting a = 40 mm Metal a a a a h = 20 mm (non-metallic base) Figure 3-29 Flush mounting in metal: SLA 71 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-27 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.4.2 Effects of Metal on the Transmission Window The following general points apply to the mounting of MOBY E components. The MDS may not be mounted directly on metal. (exception: MDS E623) Flush installation of the components in metal will reduce the field data. A test is recommended for critical applications. When working in the transmission window, make sure that metal rails or similar do not cut through the transmission field. The metal rail would affect the field data. In the case of the SLG 75 ANT 1/SIM 70 ANT 1, SLG 75 ANT 4 and SLG 72/SIM 72, the field is practically unaffected as of a distance of 40 mm to metal; in the case of the SIM 70 with the ANT 0 this is the case as of 10 mm. Using tables and graphics, this chapter shows how the field data (i.e. Sg, Sa, L, and W) are affected by metal. The values in the tables represent the reduction of field data in % as related to non-metal (i.e. 100% stands for no effect). MDS and SIM 70 with ANT 0 and SLG 75 and ANT 18/ANT 30 Table 3-5 Reduction in field data due to metal (in %): MDS and SIM 70 with ANT 0 and SLG 75 with ANT 18/ANT 30 SIM 70 SLG 75 No Metal [%] ANT 0 ANT 18 ANT 30 MDS Mounted Flush in Metal [%] ANT 0 ANT 18 Metal-free 10 mm circumference; 10 mm in depth ANT 30 Metal-free 20 mm circumference; 20 mm in depth MDS E623 MDS without metal 100 --- 100 --- MDS on metal 80 --- 80 --- MDS flush mounted in metal 60 --- 60 --- MDS without metal 100 100 100 80 MDS on metal Distance 20 mm 100 90 100 75 MDS flush mounted in metal Distance 20 mm/ Circumference 20 mm 100 75 100 70 MDS E624 3-28 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines MDS and SIM 70/ SLG 75 with ANT 1 and SLA 71 Table 3-6 MDS Reduction in field data due to metal (in %): MDS and SIM 70/SLG 75 with ANT 1 and SLA 71 SIM 70 ANT 1/SLA 71 ANT 1/SLA 71 on Metal SLG 75 without Metal [%] Distance 20 mm SLA 71 [%] ANT 1/SLA 71 Flush in Metal Distance of 20 mm Circumference 40 mm [%] ANT 1/SLA 71 on Metal [%] MDS E600 MDS without metal 100 100 80 70 MDS on metal Distance 20 mm 80 70 60 50 MDS mounted flush in metal Distance 20 mm/ circumference 20 mm 70 60 50 40 MDS without metal 100 100 80 70 MDS on metal Distance 20 mm 75 75 55 45 MDS mounted flush in metal Distance 20 mm/ circumference 20 mm 70 70 50 40 MDS without metal 100 100 80 60 MDS on metal Distance 20 mm 100 100 80 60 MDS mounted flush in metal Distance 20 mm/ circumference 20 mm 80 60 60 40 MDS E611 MDS E624 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-29 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines MDS and SLG 75 with ANT 4 Table 3-7 Reduction in field data due to metal (in %): MDS and SLG 75 with ANT 4 ANT 4 without Metal [%] ANT 4 on Metal [%] ANT 4 Flush in Metal Circumference 40 mm [%] MDS without metal 100 80 70 MDS on metal Distance 20 mm 80 70 60 MDS mounted flush in metal Distance 20 mm/ circumference 20 mm 70 60 50 MDS without metal 100 80 70 MDS on metal Distance 20 mm 80 70 60 MDS mounted flush in metal Distance 20 mm/ circumference 20 mm 70 60 50 MDS without metal 100 80 80 MDS on metal Distance 20 mm 80 70 70 MDS mounted flush in metal Distance 20 mm/ circumference 20 mm 60 40 40 SLG 75 MDS MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E624 MDS and SLG 75 with ANT 12 Table 3-8 Reduction in field data due to metal (in %): MDS and SLG 75 with ANT 12 ANT 12 without Metal [%] ANT 12 Flush in Metal Distance 10 mm Circumference 10 mm [%] ANT 12 Flush Mounted in Metal [%] MDS without metal 100 85 85 MDS on metal Distance 20 mm 100 85 85 MDS mounted flush in metal Distance 20 mm/ circumference 20 mm 75 75 60 SLG 75 MDS MDS E623 3-30 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines MDS and SLG 72/SIM 72 Table 3-9 Reduction in field data due to metal (in %): MDS and SLG 72/SIM 72 Without Metal [%] On Metal [%] Flush in Metal Circumference 40 mm [%] MDS without metal 100 100 100 MDS on metal Distance 20 mm 80 70 70 MDS mounted flush in metal Distance 20 mm/ circumference 20 mm 70 60 60 MDS without metal 100 100 80 MDS on metal Distance 20 mm 80 70 70 MDS mounted flush in metal Distance 20 mm/ circumference 20 mm 70 60 60 MDS without metal 100 100 80 MDS on metal Distance 20 mm 100 80 80 MDS mounted flush in metal Distance 20 mm/ circumference 20 mm 60 40 40 SLG/SIM 72 MDS MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E624 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-31 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Below are figures using the ANT 1 with MDS E611 as an example to illustrate how metal affects the transmission window. The percentages apply to field data reduction in relation to a metal-free environment (i.e. 100%). MDS in metal-free environment MDS E611 MDS E611 100% 70% ANT 1 ANT 1 Non-metal Metal MDS E611 MDS E611 100% 80% 40 mm ANT 1 Non-metal Metal Figure 3-30 3-32 20 mm 40 mm ANT 1 20 mm Non-metal Metal MDS in metal-free environment (example: MDS E 611) MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines MDS in metallic environment Metal 20 mm Non-metal Metal MDS E611 20 mm 75% Non-metal MDS E611 45% ANT 1 ANT 1 Non-metal Metal Metal 20 mm Non-metal 20 mm 20 mm 70% ANT 1 Non-metal Figure 3-31 20 mm MDS E611 Metal 20 mm Non-metal 20 mm 40% MDS E611 ANT 1 Metal The MDS in a metallic environment (example: MDS E611) MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-33 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.4.3 Reduction of Metallic Effects Interfering metal supports OOOOOIII OOOOO III OOOOO IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII IIIII IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII Metal supports Non-metallic spacer Sheet metal MDS Sa ANT 1 OOOOO III OOOOO OOOOO IIIII IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII IIIII IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII MDS ANT 1 Figure 3-32 3-34 Bad: A metal support is located over the second transmission window of the SLG. This support affects the entire field. Particularly the transmission window between SLG and MDS is reduced. Metal Good: The transmission window is no longer affected when the MDS and the ANT 1 are mounted differently. Interfering metal supports MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Flush mounting OOOOOOO IIII OOOOOO OOOOOOOIIIIOOOOOO OOO OOOOO OOO OOOOO IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII IIIII OOO OOOOO IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII Non-metallic spacer Sheet metal Metal ANT 1 OOOOOOOIIII OOOOOO IIII OOO IIIII OOOOO OOO IIIII OOOOO IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII OOO IIIII OOOOO IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII x 100 mm 10-20 mm ANT 1 It is usually possible to mount the MDS and SLG flush. This does, however, considerably reduce the size of the transmission window. You can counteract the reduction in window size using the following measures: Metal Increase the size of the non-metal spacer below the MDS and/or SLG. The MDS and/or SLG are 10 to 20 mm higher than the metal environment. (The value x 100 mm applies to the SLG 75 ANT 1. It specifies that at a distance of x 100 mm the SLG is no longer significantly affected by metal). Increase in the non-metallic distances a and b (see Figure 3-26). The following rules of thumb apply: OOOOO IIII OOOO OOOOO IIII OOOO OOO OOOOO OOO OOOOO OOO OOOOO IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII IIIII IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII a b Figure 3-33 a ANT 1 b Make a and b approximately 2 to 3 times larger. In the case of SLG/MDS with a large limit distance (SLG 75 ANT 1/MDS E611), an increase of a, b has a greater effect than in the case of SLG/ MDS with a small limit distance. Flush mounting Installation of several SLG/SLA on metal frames or supports Each SLG/SLA mounted on metal connects part of the field to the metal support. When minimum distance D is maintaining and metal-free areas a and b are adhered to, there are usually no effects. However, when the location of an iron frame is particularly poor, there may be some effects. This will lengthen data transmission times or cause sporadic error messages on the interface. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-35 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Necessary actions a) Lengthen distance D between the two ANT 1s ANT 1 ANT 1 D b) Install one or more iron struts to short circuit the parasitic fields ANT 1 ANT 1 c) Install a non-metallic spacer of 20 to 40 mm in thickness between the ANT 1 and the iron frame. This significantly reduces parasitic coupling of the field on the support. ANT 1 3-36 Non-metallic spacer ANT 1 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.4.4 Chemical Resistance of the Mobile Data Memories MDS E600 The MDS E600 is resistant to the substances listed in the following table. Table 3-10 Chemical resistance of the MDS E600 Substance Concentration Salt water 5% Sugar water 10% Acetic acid, hydrous solution 5% Sodium carbonate, hydrous solution 5% Ethyl alcohol, hydrous solution 60% Ethylene glycol 50% Fuel, B In accordance with ISO 1817 Human perspiration (Reference: ISO 10373 / ISO 7810) MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-37 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines MDS E611/ E623/E624 Table 3-11 Chemical resistance of data memories made of fiber glass reinforced epoxy resin (MDS E611/E623/E624) Concentration Allyl chloride Formic acid 50% 100% Ammonia, gaseous Ammonia, liquid, anhydrous Ammonium hydroxide Ethanol Ethyl acrylate Ethylene glycol Gasoline, free of aromatic compounds Gasoline, unstripped Bezoates (Na, Ca and similar) Bezoic acid Benzine Benzene-sulfonic acid Benzyl chloride Borax Boric acid Bromine, liquid Bromine, gaseous, dry Bromide (K, Na and similar) Bromoform Bromide water Butadiene (1.3-) Butane, gaseous Butanol Butyric acid Carbonates (ammonium, Na and similar.) Chlorine, liquid Chlorine, gaseous, dry Chlorobenzene Chloride (ammonia, Na and similar) Chloroform Chlorophyll Chlorosulfonic acid Chlorine water (saturated solution) Chromates (K, Na and similar) Chromic acid Chromic sulfuric acid "Lemon acid" Cyanamide Cyanides (K, Na and similar) Dextrine (hydrous solution) Diethyl ether Diethylene glycol Dimethyl ether Dioxan Developer Acetic acid Fixing bath Fluorides (ammonium, K, Na and similar.) Hydrofluoric acid Formaldehyde Formamide 3-38 10% 20 C 40 C 60 C 100% 100% 100% 100% Up to 50% Up to 30% 100% Up to 40% 50% 100% MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Table 3-11 Chemical resistance of data memories made of fiber glass reinforced epoxy resin (MDS E611/E623/E624) Concentration Gluconic acid Glycerol Glycocoll Urine Uric acid Hydroxides (ammonium) Hydroxides (Na and K) Hydroxides (alkaline earth metal) Hypochlorites (K, Na and similar) Iodides (K, Na and similar) Silicic acid Cresylol Methanol Methylene chloride Lactic acid Mineral oils Nitrates (ammonium, K and similar) Nitroglycerin Oxalic acid Phenol Phosphates (ammonium, Na and similar) Phosphoric acid Propyl alcohol Nitric acid Hydrochloric acid Brine Sulfur dioxide Carbon bisulfide, 100% Sulfuric acid Sulfurous acid Soap solution Sulfates (ammonium, Na and similar) Sulfites (ammonium, Na and similar) Tar, free of aromatic compounds Turpentine Trichlorethlylene Hydrogen peroxide Tartaric acid 20 C 40 C 60 C 10% 40% Up to 90% 100% 100% 1% 50% 85% 25% 10% 100% 40% 30% Explanation of the symbols Resistant Somewhat resistant Not resistant MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-39 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5 EMC Guidelines 3.5.1 Foreword The EMC guidelines contain the following information. Why are the EMC guidelines necessary? What interference affects the controller from the outside? How can interference be prevented? How can interference be corrected? Which standards apply to the EMC guidelines? Examples of an interference-suppressed system setup The description is directed to "qualified personnel." Configuration engineers and planners who plan system configuration with the MOBY modules and who must adhere to the required guidelines. Skilled personnel and service engineers who install the connecting cables based on this description or who can correct deficiencies in this area when a malfunction occurs. ! 3-40 Warning Non-adherence to especially highlighted notes can cause dangerous states in the system or destroy either single components or the entire system. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.2 General The continuously growing use of electrical and electronic devices brings with it the following characteristics. Greater concentration of components Increasing capacity of power electronics Rising switching speeds Lower current consumption of the components The higher the degree of automation, the greater the danger that devices will interfere with one another. Electromagnetic compatibility (i.e. EMC) is the ability of a piece of electrical or electronic equipment to function correctly in an electromagnetic environment without interfering with or adversely affecting its surroundings within certain limits. EMC can be divided into three areas. Immunity to internal interference: Resistance to internal (i.e. own) electrical interference Immunity to external interference: Resistance to external electromagnetic interference Interference emission level: Noise radiation and the effect on the electrical environment All three areas are included in the test of an electrical device. The MOBY modules are tested for adherence to the limit values contained in the CE and BAPT guidelines. Since MOBY modules are only one of many components in a total system and the combination of various components may also create sources of interference, certain guidelines must be adhered to when setting up a system. EMC measures usually consist of an entire package of measures all of which must be taken in order to obtain an interference-immune system. Note The system provider is responsible for adherence to the EMC guidelines, while the user is responsible for the interference suppression of the complete system. All measures taken while the system is being set up will eliminate the need for expensive modifications and removal of interference sources later. Country-specific provisions and regulations must be complied with. This information is not covered in the documentation. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-41 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.3 Spreading of Interference Three components are required so that interference can affect a system. Source of interference Coupling path Potentially susceptible equipment Interference source For example: a drive Figure 3-34 Coupling path For example: a MOBY cable Potentially susceptible device For example: an ASM 470 Spreading of Interference If one of these components is missing (e.g., the coupling path between the source of the interference and the potentially susceptible device), the susceptible device will not be affected even when strong interference is being emitted. The EMC measures affect all three components to prevent any malfunctions caused by interference. When a system is set up, the provider must take all possible measure to prevent the creation of sources of interference. Only equipment which meets limit value class A of VDE 0871 may be used in a system. All interference caused by devices must be suppressed. This includes all coils and windings. The layout of the cabinet must be such that reciprocal interference of the individual components is avoided or kept as low as possible. Measures must be taken to eliminate interference from external sources. The next few chapters provide information and tips on how to set up a system. 3-42 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Sources of interference It is necessary to be familiar with the most frequent sources of interference in order to achieve a high degree of electromagnetic compatibility (i.e. a very low degree of interference in the environment) in a system. These sources of interference must be eliminated by taking appropriate measures. Table 3-12 Sources of interference: origins and effects Source of interference Interference origin Effect on potentially susceptible equipment Contactor, electronic valves l Contacts Power network malfunctions Coils Magnetic field Electric motor Collector Electrical field Winding Magnetic field Contacts Electrical field Transformer Magnetic field, power network malfunction, equalizing currents Power pack, switchedmode Circuit Electrical and magnetic field, power network malfunction High-frequency devices Circuit Electromagnetic field Sender (e.g., industrial radios) Antenna Electromagnetic field Difference in grounding or reference potential Voltage difference Equalizing currents Operator Static charging Electrical discharging currents, electrical field High-voltage current cable Current flow Electrical and magnetic field, power network malfunction High-voltage cable Voltage difference Electrical field Electric welding device MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-43 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Coupling paths A coupling path is required before interference generated by the source can take effect. There are four kinds of interference coupling. I N T E R F E R E N C E Galvanic coupling path MOBY ASM or SLG Capacitive coupling path MOBY ASM or SLG Capacitive coupling path S O U R C E MOBY ASM or SLG Emission coupling Figure 3-35 MOBY ASM or SLG P O T E N T I A L L Y S U S C E P T I B L E D E V I C E The four kinds of interference coupling When MOBY modules are used, various components of the total system can act as coupling paths. Table 3-13 Causes of coupling paths Cause Coupling path Cables and lines Incorrect or unfavorable installation Missing or incorrectly connected shields Cables spaced unfavorably Switching cabinet or SIMATIC housing h i Missing or incorrectly wired equalizing line Missing or incorrect grounding Cables spaced unfavorably Modules not installed securely Poor cabinet layout 3-44 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.4 Cabinet Layout User influence on the configuration of an interference-immune system includes the cabinet layout, cable installation, grounding connections and correct shielding of lines. Note For notes on correct cabinet layout in accordance with EMC guidelines, see the layout guidelines of the SIMATIC controller. Shielding via housing Metal housings for potentially susceptible equipment can be used to keep out magnetic and electrical fields and electromagnetic waves. The better the induced interference current can flow, the greater the spontaneous weakening of the field of interference. All sheet metal on the housings or sheet metal in the cabinet must be well connected together (i.e. with a high degree of conductivity). Figure 3-36 Shielding via housing When the sheet metal parts of switching cabinets are insulated against each other, a high-frequency conductive connection with the ribbon cables and high-frequency terminals or HF conductive paste can be created. The greater the connection surface, the better the high-frequency conductive capacity. This cannot be achieved by connection with simple wires. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-45 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Avoiding interference via optimal layout Good interference diversion is achieved by installing SIMATIC controllers on conductive mounting plates (unpainted). When setting up the switching cabinet, interference can be easily avoided by adhering to guidelines. Power components (e.g., transformers, drives and load power supplies) should be installed separately (i.e. separated by space) from the controller components (e.g., relay controllers and SIMATIC S5). The following basic principles apply. 1. The effect of interference decreases the greater the distance between interference source and potentially susceptible equipment. 2. Interference is further reduced by installing shielding plates. 3. Load lines and high-voltage current cables must be installed separately from the signal lines at a distance of at least 10 cm. PS CPU/EU Shield sheet metal Drive Figure 3-37 3-46 Avoidance of interference via optimal layout MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Filtering the supply voltage External interference from the power network can be avoided by installing power network filters. In addition to correct dimensioning, proper installation is very important. It is imperative that the power network filter be installed directly at the entrance to the cabinet. Interference currents are filtered out early at the entrance and not conducted through the cabinet. Right Wrong Power filter Is Power filter Is IS = interference current Figure 3-38 Filtering the supply voltage MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-47 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.5 Avoiding Interference Sources Sources of interference in a system must be avoided so that a higher degree of interference immunity can be achieved. All circuited inductivities are a frequent cause of interference in a system. Interference suppression of inductivities Since relays, contactors and so on generate interference voltages, this interference must be suppressed with one of the following circuits. When the coil is switched, up to 800 V can be created on 24 V coils even with small relays. Several kV can be created on 220 V coils. By using freewheeling diodes or RC circuitry, the interference voltage is prevented and, with it, the inductive interference in the lines parallel to the coil lines. Relay coils Valves Contactors Brakes Figure 3-39 Inductive interference Note All coils in the cabinet must be interference-suppressed. Valves and motor brakes are frequently forgotten. Fluorescent lamps in the switching cabinet must be subjected to a special test. 3-48 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.6 Equipotential Bonding Differing system part layouts and differing voltage levels can cause differences in potential between the parts of a system. When the system parts are connected via signal lines, equalizing currents flow through these signal lines. These equalizing currents can distort the signals. This makes correct equipotential bonding imperative. The cross-section of the equipotential bonding line must be large enough (i.e. at least 10 mm2). The space between signal cable and related equipotential bonding line must be kept as small as possible (i.e. antenna effect). A fine-wire line must be used (i.e. better conduction of high frequencies). When connecting equipotential bonding lines to the central equipotential bonding rail, power components and non-power components must be combined. Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2 Power pack EU wrong EU EU PLC wrong Drive Figure 3-40 Equipotential bonding The better the equipotential bonding in a system, the smaller the chance of interference caused by fluctuations in potential. Equipotential bonding should not be confused with the protective grounding of a system. Protective grounding prevents the creation of excessive touch voltages when devices malfunction. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-49 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.7 Ground Fault Monitoring with MOBY L+ 230 V AC 24 V R R ASM R R Interface to the computer or PC Ground fault detector: If there is a voltage imbalance to protective ground on the L+ or L- cables, the circuit is interrupted. Figure 3-41 SLG L- Ungrounded power pack To connect a grounded computer or PC, the connection must contain a galvanic coupling (e.g., optocoupler). Circuit diagram of the principle of ground fault monitoring SIMATIC with ASM 400 The SIMATIC is a grounded system. In the power pack of the SIMATIC, 0 V (i.e. signal ground) is connected to the housing. On the ASM 400, the 0 V signal of the external 24 V power pack is connected with 0 V of the SIMATIC. The connection between the ASM 400 (SIMATIC) and the SLG is equipotentially bonded (i.e. RS 422 interface without galvanic isolation). A configuration with ground fault monitoring is not possible. Proceed as described in the SIMATIC manual if ground fault monitoring is necessary. SIMATIC AG 100U with ASM 410 ASM 410 C P U PLC 100 SLG Galvanic isolation 230 V AC Ground fault monitoring 24 V Figure 3-42 SIMATIC AG 100U with ASM 410 The ASM 410 is equipped with galvanic isolation to the SIMATIC CPU on the module. A configuration with ground fault monitoring is possible without any problems. 3-50 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.8 Shielding the Cables To suppress interference in the signal cables, these cables must be shielded. The best shielding effect is achieved by installation in steel piping. However, this is only necessary when the signal lines must pass through an interference-prone environment. In most cases, the use of braided shields is sufficient. In either situation, correct connection is decisive for the shielding action. Note A shield which is not connected at all or is connected incorrectly has no shielding effect. The following basic principles apply. For analog signal lines, the shield connection must be one-sided and on the receiver side. For digital signal lines, the shield connection must be two-sided on the housing. Since interference signals are frequently in the HF range (i.e. > 10 kHz), connection of the HF-capacity shield must be provided over a large surface. Figure 3-43 Shielding of the cables The shield rail must be connected to the housing of the switching cabinet over a large surface (i.e. good conductivity) and must be located as close to the cable lead-in as possible. The cables must be bared and clamped (highfrequency clamp) to the shield rail or be bound with cable binders. The location must have good conductivity. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-51 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Cable binder Remove paint Figure 3-44 Connection of the shield rail The shield bus must be connected with the protective ground (PE) bar. When shielded cables must be interrupted, the shield must also be applied to the connector housing. Only suitable connectors may be used. Shield turned up backwards by 180 and connected with the connector housing OOOOO OOOO OOOO Figure 3-45 Rubber sleeve Interruption of shielded cables When adapter plugs which do not have suitable shield termination are used, the shield must be continued through cable clamps to the point of interruption. This ensures a large-surface, HF conductive connection. 3-52 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.5.9 Basic Rules on EMC Electromagnetic compatibility (i.e. EMC) can often be ensured by following a few elementary rules. Rules which apply to the layout of the cabinet are listed below. Shielding via housing Protect the programmable controller from external interference by installing it in a cabinet or housing. The cabinet or the housing must be included in the grounding connection. Shield electromagnetic fields of inductivity from the programmable controller with separator plates. Use metallic plug housings for shielded data transmission lines. Large-surface grounding connection Connect all inactive metal parts with low HF resistance over a large surface. Provide a large-surface connection between the inactive metal parts and the central grounding point. Remember to connect the shield bus to ground. This means that there must be a large-area connection of the shield bus to ground. Aluminum parts should not be used for grounding connections. Planning the cabling Organize the cables into groups, and install these groups separately. Always install high-voltage current lines and signal lines in separate ducts or bundles. Introduce all cabling into the cabinet from only one side and, if possible, at one level. Install the signal lines as close to the grounding surfaces as possible. Twist the feeder and return conductors of individually installed conductors. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-53 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Shielding the lines Shield the data transmission lines, and apply the shield on both sides. Shield the analog lines, and apply the shield on one side (e.g., on the drive). Always apply the line shields at the cabinet entrance to the shield bus over a large surface, and secure these with clamps. Continue the applied shield without interruption to the module. Use braided shields and not foil shields. Power supply and signal filter Only use power supply filters with metal housings. Connect the filter housing (i.e. connection must be low HF resistant and over a large surface) to cabinet ground. Never secure the filter housing to painted surfaces. Secure the filter at the cabinet entrance or in the direction of the interference source. 3-54 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.6 Concept of MOBY Shielding With MOBY the data are transferred between ASM and SLG over an RS 422 interface at a speed of 19200 baud. The distance between ASM and SLG may be up to 1000 m. MOBY cable installation should be treated the same as that of a data processing system. Special attention should be paid to shielding of all data cables. The following figure shows the primary points required for a secure layout. Grounding bar for all shielded cables. It must be located as close as possible to the cable lead-in in the cabinet. The bar must be grounded to the cabinet over a large surface and use short connections. I I Additional SLGs The cable shield is applied to the SLG connector on the appropriate shield pin.The cable shield of the SLG may not be applied to a grounded point (i.e. no grounding clamp). 230 V AC 24 V Additional power consumers Each cabinet is centrally grounded. The voltage supply of the SLGs should be provided by the 2-pin connector on the ASM. The ASM is equipped with electrical fuses and a filter circuit against interference peaks. This filters out interference peaks and frequencies which may be caused by "additional power consumers." Figure 3-46 The cable jacket of the SLG cables must be bared directly at the cable lead-in. A shield clamp is used for the connection of the cable shield to the grounding bar. This will divert interference voltages of 2.5 kV on the SLG cable. Careful shield connection is particularly important for long cables or interference-prone industrial environments. Simple layout with ASM 400 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-55 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Layout of an S7-300 with MOBY When the SLG is connected to the ASM 470/475, the cable must be laid via a shield terminal. Shield connection terminals and holders are standard components of the S7-300 product family. Shield contact element Shield terminal Cable to SLG 1 Figure 3-47 Cabling for ASM 470 Cable to SLG 2 Layout of the ASM 470/475 with shield contact element To ensure EMC, an S7-300 shield contact element must be used for the SLG cable (see Figure 3-47). The shield of the SLG cable must be bared as shown in Figure 3-48. 30 170 Specifications in mm Figure 3-48 3-56 Baring of the cable shield MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Voltage supply of the SLG with power pack Connection in the switching cabinet (see Figure 3-46) I I Connection of the SLG (see Figure 3-46) 230 V AC 24 V Standard SLG cable to the ASM The mounting plate is used to connect both cable shields. This ensures continuous protection of the data lines against interference fields. Direct connection on the mounting plate with protective ground is not permitted since otherwise equalizing currents would flow over the cable shield. 220 V AC 24 V The housing of the power pack is provided with total insulation.The protective conductor is omitted for connection to the power network. Figure 3-49 Standard SLG cable to the SLG 6GT2 090-0HA00 The cable jacket of the incoming and outgoing cables must be bared as shown. The cable shields are provided with a cable clamp on the mounting plate of the power pack. Voltage supply with power pack Connection of other modules (e.g., ASM 410) To divert interference which may occur on the connecting cable to the SLG, proceed as described for the ASM 400. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-57 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.7 Cable and Connector Assignments The cable jacket of standard SLG connecting cables used with MOBY is made of polyurethane (i.e. PUR in accordance with VDE 0250). This ensures very good cable resistance to oils, acids, caustic solutions, hydraulic fluids and high resistance to UV. 3.7.1 Cable Configuration The cable between ASM and SLG requires six cores + shield. Four of these cores are assigned to the serial data interface. The power supply of the SLG requires two cores. The data can be transferred over distances of up to 1,000 m, almost without regard to the diameter of the wire. The power consumption of the SLG causes the voltage on the connecting cable to drop. The permissible cable length is usually shorter than 1000 m. The length depends on the current consumption of SLG and the ohmic resistance of the connecting cable. The following table gives you an overview of the permitted cable lengths (for standard connecting cables see Table 3-22): Table 3-14 Conductor cross-section in mm2 Cable configuration Conductor diameter in mm Resistance W/km1 SLG 72 SLG 75 ANT 1/ANT 12/ ANT 18/ANT 30 max. cable length in m (I=180 mA) UV=24 V UV=30 V 0.072 0.32 550 40 100 0.2 0.5 185 120 300 0.5 0.8 70 310 790 0.82 1.02 50 440 1000 1.52 1.42 24 920 1000 1 The resistance values are average values. They refer to the forward and return conductors. A single wire has half the resistance. 2 Use of these conductor cross-sections requires crimp contacts (not included) in the SLG connector. Field with gray background: Recommended by Siemens: Standard cable, LiYC11Y, 6 x 0.25, shielded. The cable is available from Siemens under the order number 6GT2 090-0A... Grounding of the cable We recommend always applying the shield of the SLG cable to a grounding bar over a large surface. Drum cable The SLG/SIM can also be connected by means of a drum cable. Recommended cable type: HPM Paartronic 3340-C-PUR 3 x 2 x 0.25 The cable can be customized according to your requirements. 3-58 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Supplementary power pack for SLG When an additional power pack is installed in the vicinity of the SLG, the max. 1000 m cable between the ASM and SLG can always be used. II Note Do not connect the 24 V line (pin 2 on the SLG connector) to the ASM. 6-core (with 24 V connection) SLG 24 V DC 90 230 V AC II Figure 3-50 Max. of 1000 m SLG with extra power pack The power pack shown in the drawing can be ordered from Siemens under the number 6GT2 494-0AA00 (see Section 7.2) Note With some restrictions, the power pack can be used as the main power pack for the ASM 400, ASM 724, or ASM 754. See Figure 3-51. The maximum current of the power pack (2.2 A) may not be exceeded. I SLG Pin allocation on socket connector 1, 4 2, 3 I GND +24 V 24 V DC 90 230 V AC Figure 3-51 MOBY wide-range power pack on the ASM 400 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-59 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.7.2 Connector Assignment SLG 72, SLG 75 Connector assignment of the SLG connector1 Table 3-15 Connector on the SLG 2 1 6 3 5 4 Designation Pin 1 - Receiving 2 + 24 V 3 Ground (0 V) 4 + Sending 5 - Sending 6 + Receiving Cable shield 1 This connector can be used for: SLG 72, SLG 75 ANT 1/ANT 12/ANT 18/ANT 30 Connector assignment of the 9-pin subminiature D connector1 Table 3-16 Pin Connector on the ASM 9-pin subminiature D connector with screwtype attachment 1 Not used 2 + Sending 3 + Receiving 4 Not used 5 - Receiving 6 - Sending 7 Ground (0 V) 8 + 24 V (see caution note) 9 Not used Housing 1 Designation Cable shield This connector assignment applies to ASM 400/424/454 => SLG; ES 030 => SLG Note When making your own cables, remember that the "sending" signal of the SLG must be connected to the "receiving" signal of the ASM, or vice versa. ! 3-60 Caution When using the supplementary power pack in the vicinity of the SLG, do not wire this pin to the ASM. See Table 3-16. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines SLA 71 Connector assignment of SLA connector1 Table 3-17 Connector on the SLA 5 3 8 6 7 Designation Pin 4 2 1 1 1 +12 Volt 2 + Sending 3 + Receiving 4 Not used 5 - Receiving 6 - Sending 7 Not used 8 Ground (0 V) This connector applies to: SLA 71 Connector assignment of the 9-pin subminiature D connector1 Table 3-18 Pin 9-pin subminiature D connector with screwtype attachment 1 Designation 1 +12 Volt 2 + Sending 3 + Receiving 4 Not used 5 - Receiving 6 - Sending 7 Ground (0 V) 8 Not used 9 Not used This connector assignment applies to ASM 724, ASM 754 <=> SLA 71. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-61 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Power supply connector on the ASM 424/454/724/754 Table 3-19 Connector assignment for 4-pin power supply connector (pin on the side of the housing) Pin Designation 4 3 1 Ground (0 V) 1 2 2 + 24 V 3 + 24 V 4 Ground (0 V) View of the top Ordering data Table 3-20 Ordering data for the power supply connector Connector for power supply (socket) for ASM 424/454/724/754 3-62 6GT2 390-1AB00 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Installing the SLG connector If the SLG connector has to be turned in a different direction when using a prefabricated cable, proceed as shown in the drawing below to position the contact support differently. The connector on the SLG cannot be turned. Knurled screw for solid connections (no tools needed) Removable housing cover for easy mounting Cage-claw cable retainer Crimp contacts for use even with strong vibration1 Secure the contact support in 7 positions. 1 Ordering data Crimping tool: (type XZC0700, order no. 932507-001) Available from Hirschmann GmbH+Co. D-72606 Nuertingen Tel: +49 (0) 7127/14-1479 Figure 3-52 Drawing of mounting the SLG connector Table 3-21 Ordering data for the SLG connector Connector SLG-side, 6-pin connector with socket contacts for crimping angled (contact support can be fixed in 7 positions) 1 unit 1 pack (10 units) 6GT2 090-0BA00 6GT2 090-0BA10 straight 1 unit MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6GT2 090-0UA00 3-63 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.7.3 Connecting Cables Connecting cable ASM 400/424/454, ES 030 SLG 6GT2 091-0A... or 6GT2 091-2A... ASM side SLG side 9-pin submini. D 2 (pins, screw-type 6 attachment) 6 3 4 5 5 7 3 81 2 SLG connector 2 1 (socket) Housing 1 When the supplementary power pack in the vicinity of the SLG is used, do not wire to the ASM 2 6GT2 091-0A... with angled SLG connector (standard) 6GT2 091-2A... with straight SLG connector (not shown) Connecting cable ASM 400/424/454, ES 030 SLG Figure 3-53 Connecting cable ASM 410 SLG 6GT2 091-0D... or 6GT2 091-2D... ASM side SLG side Cable with wire end ferrules 3 (7) White 6 4 (8) Brown 1 5 (9) Green 4 6 (10) Yellow 5 2 Gray 3 Pink 2 11 SLG connector 2 (socket) (Shield) 1 When the supplementary power pack in the vicinity of the SLG is used, do not wire to the ASM 2 6GT2 091-0D... with angled SLG connector (standard) 6GT2 091-2D... with straight SLG connector (not shown) Figure 3-54 ! 3-64 Connecting cable ASM 410 SLG Caution The cable shield must be secured with a shield clamp directly on the interface module and grounded on a grounding bar. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Connecting cable ASM 450/452/473 SLG 6GT2 091-1C... or 6GT2 091-2C... ASM side SLG side Two 5-pin, round M12 connectors SLG connector (socket) 2 m1 25 White X1/2 X1/1 X1/4 18.5 X1 1 standard length Figure 3-55 Connecting cable ASM 470/475 SLG 6GT2 091-0E... or 6GT2 091-2E... X2 6 Brown Green Yellow X1/3 1 4 5 Gray Pink X2/3 X2/1 X1/5 3 2 X2/5 Connecting cable ASM 450/452/473 SLG ASM side SLG side SLG connector1 (socket) Cable with wire end ferrules 4 (12) 5 (13) 6 (14) 7 (15) 8 (16) 9 (17) White Brown Green Yellow Pink Gray 6 1 4 5 2 3 (Shield) Baring of the cable shield 1 6GT2 091-0E... with angled SLG connector (standard) 6GT2 091-2E... with straight SLG connector (not shown) Figure 3-56 Connecting cable ASM 470/475 SLG MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-65 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Connecting cable RS 232 PC ASM 424/724 6GT2 391-0BH50 or 6GT2 391-0BN20 ASM side PC side 9-pin submini. D 1 (pins, screw-type 2 attachment) 3 TxD RxD RxD TxD 0V 0V 1 9-pin submini. D (socket, screw2 type attachment) 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 Housing Housing l Figure 3-57 Connecting cable ASM 724/754 SLA 71 6GT2 391-1AH50 Connecting cable RS 232 PC ASM 424/724 ASM side SLA side 9-pin submini. D 1 (pins, screw-type 2 attachment) 1 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 Pin 8 free 8 8 2 SLA connector M12, socket 9 5m Figure 3-58 3-66 Connecting cable ASM 724/754 SLA 71 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Extension cable ASM 724/754 SLA 71 6GT2 391-1BN10 or 6GT2 391-1BN25 Coupling connector side Connector M12, pin for connecting cable SLA 71 6GT2 391-1AH50 SLA side 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 SLA connector M12, socket l Figure 3-59 Connecting cable ASM 456 SLG 6GT2 091-0FH20 or 6GT2 091-0FH50 Extension cable ASM 724/754 SLA 71 ASM side SLG side Connector M12 (pin) 1 2 2 5 3 3 4 4 5 6 6 1 SLG connector (socket) 7 8 7 l Figure 3-60 Extension cable ASM 456 SLG 6GT2 891-0F... Connecting cable ASM 456 SLG ASM side Coupling connector side Connector M12 (pin) 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 Connector M12 (socket) for connecting cable ASM 456 6GT2 091-0FH.. l Figure 3-61 Extension cable ASM 456 SLG MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-67 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Connecting cable RS 232 PC e SIM 6GT2 391-1DH50 Adapter 13 14 15 15-pin submin. D (socket, screwtype attachment) 0.53 m Ground Ground TxD RxD RxD TxD 1 9 0V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Figure 3-62 3-68 2 3 + 24 V (Shield) Pin allocation for terminal module1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 5 9-pin submini. D (socket, screwtype attachment) Test cable for DI/DO and power supply Terminal PC (RS 232) side 5m SIM side Connection for connector power pack (6GT2090-0HB00) Designation + 24 V Not used DO0 Ground (0 V) DI0 DO1 DO2 Not used Ground (0 V) Ground (0 V) DPA0 DI1 GND signal ground TxD send RxD receive Housing 1 For the definition of the inputs/outputs, see Section 6.10.2 Connecting cable for RS 232 PC SIM MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3.7.4 Cable Lengths The length key for MOBY cables is no longer supported as of 01.10.2001. After that, cables will only be available in certain lengths (see Table 3-22). The cable lengths are based on the following general rules: Loose cables only come in lengths of 50 m, 120 m, and 800 m Prepared cables are only available in the lengths listed below Cables can still be made to any length (see Table 3-14) by the customer. Table 3-22 Ordering data for MOBY cables SLG plug-in line, ready-made Between ASM 400/424/454, ES 030-K and SLG Angled SLG connector Length: 5m 10 m 20 m 50 m 6GT2 091-0AH50 6GT2 091-0AN10 6GT2 091-0AN20 6GT2 091-0AN50 Length: 10 m 50 m 6GT2 091-2AN10 6GT2 091-2AN50 Length: 5m 10 m 20 m 6GT2 091-0DH50 6GT2 091-0DN10 6GT2 091-0DN20 Length: 5m 6GT2 091-2DH50 Length: 2m 5m 10 m 20 m 50 m 6GT2 091-0EH20 6GT2 091-0EH50 6GT2 091-0EN10 6GT2 091-0EN20 6GT2 091-0EN50 Length: 2m 5m 10 m 50 m 6GT2 091-2EH20 6GT2 091-2EH50 6GT2 091-2EN10 6GT2 091-2EN50 Straight SLG connector Between ASM 410 and SLG Angled SLG connector Straight SLG connector Between ASM 470/475 and SLG Angled SLG connector Straight SLG connector MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 3-69 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Table 3-22 Ordering data for MOBY cables SLG plug-in line, ready-made Between ASM 450/452/473 and SLG Angled SLG connector Length: 2 m (Standard) 5m 10 m 20 m 50 m 6GT2 091-1CH20 6GT2 091-1CH50 6GT2 091-1CN10 6GT2 091-1CN20 6GT2 091-1CN50 Straight SLG connector Length: 2m 6GT2 091-2CH20 2 m (Standard) 5m 6GT2 091-0FH20 6GT2 091-0FH50 Between ASM 456 and SLG Angled SLG connector Length: Extension for 6GT2 091-0FH.. Length: 2m 5m 10 m 20 m 50 m Standard connecting cable between SLA 71 ASM 724/ASM 754 (length 5 m, not included with SLA 71) 6GT2 891-0FH20 6GT2 891-0FH50 6GT2 891-0FN10 6GT2 891-0FN20 6GT2 891-0FN50 6GT2 391-1AH50 Extension for antenna line 6GT2 391-1AH50 Length: 10 m 25 m MOBY E SIM-RS 232 test cable with connecting line for DI/DO and connection for power supply (total length of 5 m) 6GT2 391-1BN10 6GT2 391-1BN25 6GT2 391-1DH50 Plug-in line, 24 V Plug-in line, 2-core for the 24 V DC power supply of the ASM 400. Plug-in line has plug connectors on both sides Length: 2m 5m 24 V DC plug-in line for wide-range power supply unit 6GT2 494-0AA00 (length 5 m) 6GT2 091-0CH20 6GT2 091-0CH50 6GT2 491-1HH50 Plug-in line RS 232 Between PC and ASM 424/724 Length: 3-70 5m 20 m 6GT2 391-0BH50 6GT2 391-0BN20 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines Table 3-22 Ordering data for MOBY cables Cable (without connector) SLG cable, without connector between ASM and SLG; Type 6 x 0.25 mm2 Length: MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 50 m 120 m 800 m 6GT2 090-0AN50 6GT2 090-0AT12 6GT2 090-0AT80 3-71 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3-72 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Mobile Data Memories MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 4 4-1 Mobile Data Memories 4.1 Introduction Application area MOBY identification systems ensure that useful data accompany a product from the very beginning. Mobile data memories are attached to the product or its conveyor or its packaging unit and are written, changed and read - all without contact. All important information related to production and material flow control is included right on the product. Its sturdy design permits use in rugged environments and makes the MDS insensitive to many chemical substances. Layout and functions The primary components of the mobile data memories (i.e. MDS) include logic, antenna and EEPROM. When an MDS moves into the transmission field of the read-write device/ read-write antenna (i.e. SLG/SLA), the power supply unit generates and monitors the necessary power for all switching elements. The pulse-coded information is conditioned for further processing as purely digital signals. In addition to managing the various memories, the monitoring unit takes care of data handling and the check routines. Overview Table 4-1 Overview of MDS MDS type Memory size gross/net Temperature range (during operation) DimenProsions tection (W x H x D rating in mm) MDS E600 1.024 gross EEPROM bytes 752 net byte capacity -25 to +60 C 85x54x0.8 IP68 MDS E611 1.024 gross EEPROM bytes 752 net byte capacity -25 to +70 C 85x54x2.5 IP67 MDS E623 1.024 gross EEPROM bytes 752 net byte capacity -25 to +85 C 10x4.5 IP67 MDS E624 1.024 gross EEPROM bytes 752 net byte capacity -25 to +125 C 27x4 IP67 Definition of IP67: - Protection against the penetration of dust (i.e. dustproof) - Total protection again accidental touch - Protection against water under certain pressure and time conditions Definition of IP68: - Protection against the penetration of dust (i.e. dustproof) - Total protection again accidental touch - MDS can be submerged in water. Contact the manufacturer for requirements. Definition of IPx9K: - Steam jet at distance of 150 mm - 10 of 15 l water per minute - Pressure: 100 bar - Temperature: 75 C 4-2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Mobile Data Memories Operational requirements/ environmental requirements Table 4-2 Operational requirements/environmental requirements of MDS MDS E600 Proof of physical strength is determined by an oscillation test. ISO 7810, ISO 10373 MDS E611 / MDS E623 / MDS E624 EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Test conditions: Frequency range Amplitude of the dis- 2 to 500 Hz Acceleration Test duration per axis Throughput speed 20 g (26 to 500 Hz) 7.5 mm (2 to 26 Hz) placement 20 frequency cycles 1 octave/min. Proof of physical strength is determined by continuous shock stress. EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3 Test conditions: Acceleration 100 g Duration 6 ms Test duration per axis 500 impacts per axis Torsion and bending stress In accordance with ISO 10373/ ISO 7816-1 Not permitted Protection rating in accordance with EN 60529 IP68 IP67 -25 C to +60 C -25 C to +70 C/+85 C/+125 C -40 C to +85 C/+100 C/+150 C Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage ! -25 C to +60 C Temperature gradient over sto- 3 C/min rage temperature range in accordance with part 2-4 of DIN IEC 68 3 C/min Temperature gradient for rapid temperature change in accordance with part 2-14 of DIN IEC 68 Duration of 30 min per maximum; Transition from one maximum to another: approx. 10 sec, 100 cycles Duration of 30 min per maximum; Transition from one maximum to another: approx. 10 sec, 100 cycles Warning The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and may not occur continuously. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 4-3 Mobile Data Memories 4.2 MDS E600 Ordering data Figure 4-1 MDS E600 Table 4-3 Ordering data for MDS E600 Order Number MDS E600 mobile data memory with 752-byte EEPROM Accessories: Mounting bracket Technical data 4-4 Table 4-4 6GT2 300-0AA00 6GT2 390-0AA00 Technical data of the MDS E600 Memory size 1024-byte EEPROM, 752 bytes for use as desired Memory organization Access as desired MTBF (at +40 C) 2 x 106 hours Read cycles Unlimited Minimum write cycles 200 000 Typical write cycles 1 000 000 Data retention time (at < +40 C) > 10 years Read/write distances See field data Direction dependent No Vibration ISO 10 373/ISO 7810 Torsion and bending stress ISO 10373/ISO 7816-1 Mounting of the MDS Adhesive/mounting bracket Protection rating in accordance with EN 60529 IP68 Physical layout Laminated PVC card, printable on one side Color Anthracite/white Material PVC Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm 85.6 x 54 x 0.76 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Mobile Data Memories Table 4-4 Technical data of the MDS E600 Ambient temperature -25 C to +60 C -25 C to +60 C during operation during transportation and storage Weight, approximate Field data Table 4-5 6g Field data of MDS E600 SLG 75 ANT 1 SLG 75 ANT 4 SLG 72 SLA 71 0 to 50 mm 0 to 50 mm 0 to 50 mm 0 to 50 mm 70 mm 70 mm 70 mm 70 mm Transmission window (L) 60 mm (Ld) 220 mm (Ld) 75 mm (Lx)1 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS > 400 mm Working distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) 1 60 mm (Ld) )1 50 mm (Ly > 400 mm > 400 mm > 400 mm For the field geometry, see also Figure 5-2 The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 4-5 Mobile Data Memories Dimensions (in mm) Dimensioned drawing MDS E600 85.6 0.2 R3 54 0.2 A A 0.76 0.08 Section A-A: Mounting bracket for MDS E600 The mounting bracket is secured on a non-metallic base with M4 countersunk screws using the holes provided. The mounting bracket must lay flat on the base. If not, locking will not work and the MDS may fall out of the mounting bracket. Note The mounting bracket shown here (i.e. order no. 6GT2 390-0AA00) is not suitable for the spacer shown in Figure 4-6 (6GT2 190-0AA00). 33 +0.3 65 +0.5 4.5 110 +0.5 5 +0.5 100 +0.3 Material: PA 6 Note You can also use the mounting bracket (6GT2 190-0AB00) when mounting the MDS E600 on metal, but only when used with the spacer (6GT2 190-0AA00) (for dimensions see Figure 4-6). Figure 4-2 4-6 MDS E600 and its mounting bracket MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Mobile Data Memories Metal-free space Mounting on metal Metal Data memory Non-metal 20 mm Flush mounting in metal b Data memory a h Metal Non-metal Standard values: Figure 4-3 a 20 mm b 20 mm h 20 mm Metal-free space for MDS E600 Note Underranging the standard values a, b and h will significantly reduce the field data. For installation in metallic environment, read and adhere to the information in chapter 3.4.2. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 4-7 Mobile Data Memories 4.3 MDS E611 Ordering data Figure 4-4 MDS E611 Table 4-6 Ordering data for MDS E611 Order Number MDS E611 mobile data memory with 752-byte EEPROM 6GT2 300-0BB00 Accessories: Spacer Mounting bracket Technical data 4-8 Table 4-7 6GT2 190-0AA00 6GT2 190-0AB00 Technical data of the MDS E611 Memory size 1024-byte EEPROM, 752 bytes for use as desired Memory organization Access as desired MTBF (at +40 C) 2.5 x 106 hours Read cycles Unlimited Minimum write cycles 200 000 Typical write cycles 1 000 000 Data retention time (at < +40 C) > 10 years Read/write distances See field data Direction dependent No Vibration 20 g Shock 100 g Torsion and bending stress Not permitted Mounting of the MDS Adhesive/mounting bracket Protection rating in accordance with EN 60529 IP67 Physical layout Epoxy card Color Anthracite/black Material Fiber glass-reinforced epoxy resin MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Mobile Data Memories Table 4-7 Technical data of the MDS E611 Dimensions (L x W x H) in mm 85.8 x 54.1 x 2.5 Ambient temperature -25 C to +70 C -40 C to +85 C during operation during transportation and storage Weight, approximate Field data Table 4-8 21 g Field data of MDS E611 SLG 75 ANT 1 SLG 75 ANT 4 SLG 72 SLA 71 10 to 70 mm 10 to 70 mm 10 to 70 mm 10 to 70 mm 100 mm 90 mm 100 mm 100 mm Transmission window (L) 80 mm (Ld) 250 mm (Ld) 90 mm (Lx)1 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS > 400 mm Working distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) 1 80 mm (Ld) )1 60 mm (Ly > 400 mm > 400 mm > 400 mm For the field geometry, see also Figure 5-2 The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS. Dimensions (in mm) Dimensioned drawing R3 54.1 0.2 3.2 A A 60 0.2 85.8 0.2 Section A-A: Figure 4-5 2.5 0.2 Dimensions of MDS E611 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 4-9 Mobile Data Memories Dimensioned drawing Spacker: 6GT2 190-0AA00 Mounting bracket: 6GT2 190-0AB00 Tabs 24 98 Holding knobs 21 34 62 57 110 88 107 121 36 4.5 2.5 Holding bracket 60 Material: PA 6 10 The spacer can be mounted directly on metal. Together with the mounting bracket, this results in a distance of 20 mm between the MDS and metal. Mounting: - With 2 or 4 M4 screws - With rubber pads on the holding brackets (e.g., on mesh boxes) - With cable binders on the holding brackets (e.g., on mesh boxes) MDS with mounting bracket MDS with mounting bracket and spacer (assembled) Mounting bracket Slide the MDS into the mounting bracket. It is locked in place by means of the stop knobs in the mounting bracket. The tabs of the mounting bracket are secured to a non-metal base as listed below. This can be done as follows: - Screws in the holes provided - Rivets in the holes provided - Nails through the holes - Staples through the plastic of the tabs - Insertion in the spacer The tabs can also be bent by 90. Figure 4-6 4-10 Spacer SIEMENS Data memory Assembly: The MDS is pushed into the mounting bracket. The tabs are then bent by 90 and inserted in the spacer. Position the mounting bracket so that it covers the MDS as shown in the figure. It is automatically locked into place. Dimensions of the spacer and mounting bracket for the MDS E611 (for use with the MDS E600, see note in Figure 4-2) MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Mobile Data Memories Metal-free space Mounting on metal Metal Data memory Non-metal 20 mm Flush mounting in metal b Data memory a h Metal Non-metal Standard values: Figure 4-7 a 20 mm b 20 mm h 20 mm Metal-free space for MDS E611 Note Underranging the standard values a, b and h will significantly reduce the field data. The MDS may be mounted with metal screws. This has no substantial effect on the range. For installation in metallic environment, read and adhere to the information in chapter 3.4.2. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 4-11 Mobile Data Memories 4.4 MDS E623 The MDS E623 was constructed for tool coding in accordance with DIN 69873. It can be used everywhere where small data carriers and precise positioning are required (e.g., tool identification). Ordering data Figure 4-8 MDS E623 Table 4-9 Ordering data for MDS E623 Order Number MDS E623 mobile data memory Technical data Table 4-10 6GT2 300-0CD00 Technical data of the MDS E623 Memory size 1024-byte EEPROM, 752 bytes for use as desired Memory organization Access as desired MTBF (at +40 C) 2.5 x 106 hours Read cycles Unlimited Minimum write cycles 200 000 Typical write cycles 1 000 000 Data retention time (at < +40 C) > 10 years Read/write distances See field data Direction dependent No Vibration 20 g Shock 100 g Torsion and bending stress Not permitted Mounting of the MDS Adhesive1; e.g. Araldit AW 2101/HW2951 or 2021; UHU-Plus endfest 300 Protection rating In accordance with EN 60529 In accordance with DIN 40050 (part 9) 4-12 IP67 IPx9K (steamer: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C) MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Mobile Data Memories Table 4-10 Technical data of the MDS E623 Physical layout Molded, shock-resistant plastic Color Black Material Epoxy resin Dimensions (D x H) in mm (dimensions and tolerances in accordance with DIN 69873) 10 x 4.5 (chamfer on the underside 0.5 x 45) Ambient temperature during operation during transportation and storage Weight, approximate 1 Field data -25 C to +85 C -40 C to +100 C 4g The processing specifications of the manufacturer must be adhered to. Table 4-11 Field data MDS E623 SIM 70 ANT 0 SLG 75 ANT 18 SLG 75 ANT 12 Metal-free installation (static) Working distance (Sa) 0 to 6 mm 0 to 6 mm 0 to 4 mm Transmission window (Ld) 4 mm (average deviation 2 mm) 4 mm (average deviation 2 mm) 8 mm (average deviation 4 mm) 6 mm 6 mm 5 mm Limit distance (Sg) Flush mounting in metal (static) Working distance (Sa) 0 to 3.5 mm 0 to 3.5 mm 0 to 3 mm Transmission window (Ld) 4 mm (average deviation 1.5 mm) 4 mm (average deviation 1.5 mm) 4 mm (average deviation 2 mm) 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm > 30 mm > 30 mm > 20 mm Limit distance (Sg) Minimum distance from MDS to MDS Note The MDS E623 is only designed for static operation. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 4-13 Mobile Data Memories Metal-free space Mounting on metal Data memory Metal SIEMENS MDS E623 MDS E623 can be mounted directly on metal Figure 4-9 Mounting on metal: MDS E623 Flush mounting in metal Data memory Metal SIEMENS MDS E623 MDS E623 can be mounted flush in metal. Figure 4-10 Metal-free space for MDS E623 For installation in metallic environment, read and adhere to the information in chapter 3.4.2. 4-14 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Mobile Data Memories MDS E623 Z Metal d2 Antenna side (active surface) d1 Mounting the MDS E623 flush in metal with tools b1 b2 t2 t1 Figure 4-11 Dimensions and installation space for MDS E623 Table 4-12 Dimensions of MDS E623/installation space in accordance with DIN 69873 MDS E623 Installation space b1 0.5 x 45 b2 0.3 x 45 or R 0.3 d1 10 -0.04 -0.13 d2 10 +0.09 0 t1 4,5 -0 -0.1 t2 4,6 +0.2 0 The MDS may not protrude out of the receptacle hole. It must be flush with the outside contours. Follow the installation instructions for the MDS and take into account the particular conditions of your project (e.g., scope speed, temperature and use of cooling lubricant). Mounting with adhesive Bore mounting opening. The surface to which adhesive will be applied must be dry and free of dust, grease, stripping agents and other soil. Apply adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Press MDS E623 in by hand. Antenna side to outside (see Figure 4-11). Remove extra adhesive. Allow to harden in accordance with the instructions of the adhesive manufacturer. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 4-15 Mobile Data Memories Examples of mounting Z Figure 4-12 Example of mounting the MDS E623 in a quick-release taper shaft Z Figure 4-13 4-16 Example of mounting the MDS E623 in a retention shaft MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Mobile Data Memories 4.5 MDS E624 Ordering data Figure 4-14 MDS E624 Table 4-13 Ordering data for MDS E624 Order Number MDS E624 mobile data memory with 752-byte EEPROM Technical data Table 4-14 6GT2 300-0CE00 Technical data of the MDS E624 Memory size 1024-byte EEPROM, 752 bytes for use as desired Memory organization Access as desired MTBF (at +40 C) 2.5 x 106 hours Read cycles Unlimited Minimum write cycles 200 000 Typical write cycles 1 000 000 Data retention time (at < +40 C) > 10 years Read/write distances See field data Direction dependent No Vibration 20 g Shock 100 g Torsion and bending stress Not permitted Mounting of the MDS Adhesive/M3 screw Tightening torque at +20C 1 Nm Protection rating In accordance with EN 60529 In accordance with DIN 40050 (part 9) MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 IP67 IPx9K (steamer: 150 mm; 10 to 15 l/min; 100 bar; 75 C) 4-17 Mobile Data Memories Table 4-14 Technical data of the MDS E624 Physical layout Molded, shock-resistant plastic Color Black Material Epoxy resin Dimensions (DxH) in mm 27 x 4 Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage -25 C to +125 C -40 C to +150 C Weight, approximate 5g Field data Table 4-15 Field data of MDS E624 Working distance (Sa) Limit distance (Sg) Transmission window (L) Minimum distance from MDS to MDS 1 SLG 75 ANT 18 SLG 75 ANT 1 SLG 75 ANT 4 SLG 72 SLG 75 ANT 30 SLA 71 0 to 8 mm 0 to 25 mm 0 to 25 mm 0 to 30 mm 0 to 18 mm 0 to 25 mm 15 mm 40 mm 35 mm 40 mm 24 mm 40 mm 12 mm (Ld) 38 mm (Ld) 200 mm (Ld) 60 mm (Lx)1 14 mm (Ld) 38 mm (Ld) > 60 mm > 250 mm 40 mm > 50 mm > 250 mm > 250 mm (Ly)1 > 250 mm For the field geometry, see also Figure 5-2 The field data apply to read and write-accesses of the MDS. Dimensions (in mm) 3.5 6 4 0.2 27 0.2 Figure 4-15 4-18 Dimensions of MDS E624 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Mobile Data Memories Metal-free space Mounting on metal Data memory Metal SIEMENS Non-metal MDS E624 h 20 mm Flush mounting in metal Data memory Metal SIEMENS a 20 mm Non-metal MDS E624 h 20 mm Figure 4-16 Metal-free space for MDS E624 Note Underranging the standard values a and h will significantly reduce the field data. The MDS may be mounted with metal screws (i.e. M3 countersunk screws). This has no substantial effect on the range. For installation in metallic environment, read and adhere to the information in chapter 3.4.2. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 4-19 Mobile Data Memories 4-20 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Read/Write Devices Read/Write Antennas MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 5 5-1 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas 5.1 Introduction Application area The SLGs/SLAs provide inductive communication with the mobile data memories (i.e. MDSs) and the serial link to the interfaces (i.e. ASMs). Various SLG/SLA models - for short, medium and long distances to the MDS - are available to meet customer requirements. Layout and functions The SLG/SLA executes commands received from the interface. These commands for reading and writing data are converted via a modulator/demodulator circuit. Communication between MDS and SLG/SLA takes place via inductive alternating fields. The volume of data that can be transmitted between the SLG/SLA and MDS depends on the following: The speed at which the MDS moves through the SLG/SLA's transmission window The length of the transmission window Table 5-1 Overview table of SLG/SLA Working distance Sa (depending on MDS) Limit distance Sg Temperature range (during operation) Circuit dimensions (L x W x H) in mm Antenna dimensions (L x W x H) in mm Protection rating SLG 72 0 to 70 mm 100 mm -25 to +70 C 160 x 80 x 40 --- IP65 SLG 75 ANT 1 0 to 70 mm 100 mm -25 to +70 C 160 x 80 x 40 75 x 75 x 20 IP65 SLG 75 ANT 4 0 to 70 mm 100 mm -25 to +70 C 160 x 80 x 40 320 x 80 x 30 IP65 SLG 75 ANT 12 0 to 4 mm 5 mm -25 to +70 C 160 x 80 x 40 M12 x 40 IP65 SLG 75 ANT 18 0 to 8 mm 15 mm -25 to +70 C 160 x 80 x 40 M18 x 50 IP65 SLG 75 ANT 30 0 to 18 mm 24 mm -25 to +70 C 160 x 80 x 40 M30 x 58 IP65 SLA 71 0 to 70 mm 100 mm -25 to +70 C --- 75 x 75 x 20 IP65 SLG Type Definition of IP65: - Protection against penetration of dust (i.e. dust-proof) - Full protection against touch - Protection against water jet Definition of IP67: - Protection against the penetration of dust (i.e. dustproof) - Total protection again accidental touch - Protection against water under specified pressure and time conditions 5-2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas 5.2 SLG 72 Application area Ordering data Technical data The SLG 72 is a read/write device in the medium performance range. Due to the larger dimensions of the antenna, the SLG 72 creates a greater field than the SLG 75 ANT 1. In dynamic operation greater volumes of data can be read/written by the MDS (see Section 3.3). Figure 5-1 Read/write device SLG 72 Table 5-2 Ordering data for the SLG 72 Read/write device SLG 72 6GT2 301-0CA00 SLG connector and plug-in line See Section 3.7 Table 5-3 Technical data of the SLG 72 Inductive interface to MDS Max. SLG-MDS read/write distances 100 mm (see field data) Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Serial interface to ASM RS 422 Data transmission speed 19200 Baud Max. ASM - SLG cable length (with 24 V DC and a conductor cross-section of 0.2 mm2) 120 m Max. data cable length. See cable configuration in Table 3-14. 1000 m MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 5-3 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Table 5-3 Technical data of the SLG 72 Supply voltage (via serial interface) 24 V DC 20 to 30 V DC Nominal value Permissible range Current consumption Max. of 700 mA 180 mA (typical) Brief switch-on current Operation (at 24 V) 2.5 x 105 hours MTBF (at +40 C) Housing Dimensions (in mm) 160 x 80 x 40 Color Anthracite Material Polyamide 12 Connector 6-pin SLG connector in accordance with DIN 43651 Protection rating in accordance with EN 60529 IP65 Shock in accordance with EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum, type II 30 g1 Vibration in accordance with EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 1g 1.5 g Mounting of SLG 2 M5 screws Tightening torque at room temperature 2 Nm Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage -25 C to + 70 C -40 C to + 85 C Weight (approx.) 550 g 1 Field data Without connector (W x H x D) Warning: The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not occur continuously. The exact field data are dependent on the type of MDS used. Table 5-4 5-4 (9 to 200 Hz)1 (200 to 500 Hz)1 Field data of SLG 72 Working distance (Sa) 0 to 70 mm Limit distance (Sg) 100 mm Transmission window Depends on MDS Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D) Da > 800 mm Db > 800 mm MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Transmission window OOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOO Transmission window MDS Side view Sa Sg SLG 72 70 Standard configuration: longitudinal x-axis (Lx) OOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOO Top view M Ly, (Sa, max) = Ly Ly, (Sa, max) = Ly Lx, (Sa, min) 1 1 Lx, (Sa, min) 1 At Sa, min, the transmission window may increase. Figure 5-2 Transmission window of the SLG 72 Metal-free space Metal h h = Physical height of SLG Metal b b a a a, b = Metal-free distances = 40 mm Figure 5-3 Metal-free space of SLG 72 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 5-5 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas FCC information Made in Germany SIEMENS MOBY E SLG 72 FCC ID: NXWMOBYE-SLG72 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Definition of the distance D Da Y SLG 72 Y X X SLG 72 Db Da 800 mm Db 800 mm Y SLG 72 X Figure 5-4 Dimensions (in mm) Distance D: SLG 72 80 5 40 X 70 Y 160 90 5,5 25 Figure 5-5 5-6 5 Dimensioned drawing SLG 72 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas 5.3 SLG 75 Application area SLG 75 The SLG 75 ANT is a read/write device in the middle of the performance range. It can only be used with ANT 1, ANT 4, ANT 12, ANT 18 and ANT 30. The antennas can be very easily positioned for any application. The cable between the antenna and evaluation unit is 3 m long. The length cannot be changed. The antenna cable can be connected on the SLG side. The SLG 75 can be operated at the following interfaces: ASM 400, ASM 410, ASM 424, ASM 450, ASM 452, ASM 454, ASM 470, ASM 473 and ASM 475. Figure 5-6 Areas of application of the antennas Read/write device SLG 75 ANT 1 Figure 5-7 ANT 1 for SLG 75 The ANT 1 is an antenna in the middle of the performance range which is very useful in production plants and assembly lines because of its easily handled housing. The antenna's dimensions make it possible to read/write large volumes of data from/to the MDS during operation. The antenna cable can be connected on the SLG side. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 5-7 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas ANT 4 Figure 5-8 ANT 4 for SLG 75 The ANT 4 was specially conceived for use in manufacturing plans and assembly lines. Due to its wide transmission area, the antenna can be used every where high speeds are required. The cable length between the antenna and the evaluating processor unit is 1 m and is connected to the electronics side. ANT 12 Figure 5-9 ANT 12 for the SLG 75 The ANT 12 is intended primarily for tool identification. The very small size of the antenna permits very accurate positioning using the plastic nuts included with it. The antenna cable can be connected on the SLG side. Data carrier communication is only possible with the MDS E623 (tool pill) in static mode. 5-8 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas ANT 18 Figure 5-10 ANT 18 for the SLG 75 The ANT 18 was designed primarily for use in small assembly lines. The small, compact dimensions of the antenna with its two plastic nuts (included with the product) make it easy to position for any application. The antenna cable can be connected on the SLG side. Data carrier communication is only possible with the MDS E624 in static mode. ANT 30 Figure 5-11 ANT 30 for the SLG 75 The ANT 30 was designed primarily for use in small assembly lines. The maximum read/write range is approximately 60% greater than the ANT 18. The compact dimensions of antenna with its two plastic nuts (included with the product) make it very easy to position for any application. The antenna cable can be connected on the SLG side. Data carrier communication is only possible with the MDS E624 in static mode. Ordering data Table 5-5 Ordering data for the SLG 75 and ANT xx SLG 75 write/read device with RS 422 serial interface The antenna is not included with the SLG 75 and must be ordered separately. 6GT2 398-1AF00 Antennas: ANT 1 ANT 4 ANT 4 ANT 12 ANT 18 ANT 30 75 x 75 x 20 (L x W x H) 320 x 80 x 30 (L x W x H) 320 x 80 x 30 (L x W x H) M12 x 1.0 x 40 ( x wght x L) M18 x 1.0 x 55 ( x wght x L) M30 x 1.5 x 58 ( x wght x L) SLG connector and plug-in line 1 6GT2 398-1CB00 6GT2 398-1CE00 6GT2 398-1CE00-0AX01 6GT2 398-1CC00 6GT2 398-1CA00 6GT2 398-1CD00 See Section 3.7 with antenna cable with hose MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 5-9 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Technical data Table 5-6 Technical data of the SLG 75 SLG 75 Read/write device Inductive interface to MDS ANT-MDS read/write distances See field data Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Serial interface to ASM RS 422 Data transmission speed 19200 Baud Max. ASM - SLG cable length (with 24 V DC and a conductor cross-section of 0.2 mm2) 120 m Max. data cable length. See cable configuration in Table 3-14. 1000 m MDS addressing command Direct access via addresses Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS Supply voltage (via serial interface) 24 V DC 20 to 30 V DC Nominal value Permissible range Current consumption Max. of 700 mA 180 mA (typical) Switch-on current (brief) Operation (at 24 V DC) 2.5 x 105 hours MTBF (at +40 C) Housing Dimensions (in mm) Electronics w/o connectors (L x W x H) 160 x 80 x 40 Color Anthracite Material Plastic (PA 12) Connector Data Protection rating in accordance with EN 60529 IP65 Vibration in accordance with EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2 30 g1 Vibration in accordance with EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2 1g 1.5 g Mounting of SLG 2 M5 screws Tightening torque at room temperature 3 Nm Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage -25 C to + 70 C -40 C to + 85 C Weight (approx.) 520 g Certification CE, UL/CSA, FCC 1 5-10 6-pin SLG connector in accordance with DIN 43651 (pin, device side) Warning: (3 to 200 Hz)1 (200 to 500 Hz)1 The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not occur continuously. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Table 5-7 Technical data of the antennas Antenna ANT 1 ANT 4 ANT 12 ANT 18 ANT 30 Write/read distance, max. ANT-MDS (Sg). 100 mm 100 mm 5 mm 15 mm 24 mm Housing dimensions in mm 75 x 75 x 20 (L x W x H) 320 x 80 x 30 (L x W x H) M12 x 1.0 x 40 ( x wght x L) M18 x 1.0 x 55 ( x wght x L) M30 x 1.5 x 58 ( x wght x L) Color Anthracite Pastel turquoise Material Plastic (PA 12) Plastic Crastin Connector 4-pin pin, antenna side Antenna line length 3m Protection rating in accordance with EN 60529 IP67 2 plastic nuts M12 x 1.0 2 plastic nuts M18 x 1.0 2 plastic nuts M30 x 1.5 45 g 120 g 150 g 1m 3m IP67 (front) Vibration in accordance with EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2 50 g1 Vibration in accordance with EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2 20 g Mounting of antenna (3 to 500 Hz)1 2 M5 screws Ambient temperature During operation -25 C to +70 C During transportation and storage -40 C to +85 C MTBF (at +40 C) 2.5 x 105 hours Weight (approx.) 80 g 1 Warning: 950 g The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not occur continuously. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 5-11 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Table 5-8 Cable specification of the ANT 12 antenna Type of line Coaxial transmission line 50 suitable for dragchain Sheath PUR External diameter 5.2 mm Mechanical stability Bending radius - one-time 5 x External diameter - repeated 15 x External diameter 2 x 106 Cycles Dragchain Ambient temperature during operation - with fixed wiring - with flexible wiring -30 C to +70 C -5 C to +50 C Approval UL (in accordance with style 1354) Field data Table 5-9 Field data of the SLG 75 with antenna ANT 1 ANT 4 Working distance (Sa) 0 to 70 mm 0 to 70 mm 0 to 4 mm 0 to 8 mm 0 to 18 mm Limit distance (Sg) 100 mm 100 mm 5 mm 15 mm 24 mm Diameter of the transmis- Depends on sion window (Ld) MDS Depends on MDS 8 mm Depends on MDS 14 mm Minimum distance from SLG to SLG (D) > 800 mm SLG 75 5-12 800 mm ANT 12 80 mm ANT 18 125 mm ANT 30 200 mm MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Transmission window Transmission window: The antenna of the MDS must be positioned within this field to ensure reliable data transfer. OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO MDS Transmission window Sa Sg Side view Top view L (Sa,max) = Ld L (Sa, min) 1 Figure 5-12 1 The transmission window may be larger at Sa, min. Transmission window of the ANT 1 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO MDS Transmission window Sa Sg Side view Top view L (Sa,max) = Ld L (Sa,min) 1 1 The transmission window may be larger at Sa, min. Figure 5-13 Transmission window of the ANT 4 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 5-13 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Transmission window Ld Ld sa sg Top view Side view Figure 5-14 Transmission window of the ANT 12 Ld L (Sa, min) 1 Ld sg sa Top view Side view Figure 5-15 1 The transmission window may be larger at Sa, min. Transmission window of the ANT 18 Transmission window Ld Ld sa sg Top view Side view Figure 5-16 5-14 Transmission window of the ANT 30 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Metal-free space Metal-free space with flush mounting a = 40 mm Metal a a a a h = 20 mm (non-metallic base) Figure 5-17 Metal-free space for the ANT 1 Metal-free space with flush mounting a = 40 mm Metal a a a a Figure 5-18 Metal-free space for the ANT 4 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 5-15 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas IIIIII IIIIII IIIIII IIIIII IIIIII IIIIII MOBYE ANT 12 Top view Side view Note: Flush installation in metal reduces the limit and working distance. Figure 5-19 Metal-free space for the ANT 12 IIIIII IIIIII IIIIII IIIIII IIIIII IIIIII 10 a MOBY E ANT 18 10 a = 10 mm b = 10 mm Metal-free space with flush installation Note: The limit and working distances are reduced when the metal-free space is not adhered to. Metal-free space for the ANT 18 IIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIIII 20 20 20 Figure 5-20 ANT 18 MOBYE ANT 30 Side view Top view Figure 5-21 5-16 Metal-free space for the ANT 30 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas FCC information Made in Germany SIEMENS MOBY E SLG 75 FCC ID: NXWMOBYE-SLG75 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 5-17 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Definition of the Distance D Da ANT 1 ANT 1 Db Da 800 mm Db 800 mm ANT 1 Figure 5-22 The SLG electronics can be mounted directly next to each other. Distance D: ANT 1 Da ANT 4 ANT 4 Db Da 800 mm Db 800 mm ANT 4 Figure 5-23 The SLG electronics can be mounted directly next to each other. Distance D: ANT 4 Da Db Da Db 80 mm 80 mm The SLG electronics can be mounted directly next to each other. Figure 5-24 5-18 Distance D: ANT 12 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Da Db Da 125 mm Db 125 mm The SLG electronics can be mounted directly next to each other. Figure 5-25 Distance D: ANT 18 Da Db Da Db 200 mm 200 mm The SLG electronics can be mounted directly next to each other. Figure 5-26 Distance D: ANT 30 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 5-19 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Dimensions (in mm) 80 5 40 160 5,5 25 Figure 5-27 5 Dimensioned drawing of SLG 75 Cable length 3 m Minimum bending radius: 20 mm 5 20 75 ANT 1 can be connected on electronics side Figure 5-28 Dimensioned drawing of the ANT 1 Minimum bending radius: 20 mm 5 80 Cable length 1 m ANT 4 can be connected on electronics side Figure 5-29 5-20 30 5 320 Dimensioned drawing of the ANT 4 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas 40 Minimum bending radius: 20 mm M12 Fine thread Gradient 1.0 Cable length 3 m Antenna side Side view of the antenna head Dimensioned drawing of the ANT 12 55 Minimum bending radius: 20 mm Antenna side M18 Fine thread Gradient 1.0 Cable length 3 m ANT 18 Side view of the antenna head Dimensioned drawing of the ANT 18 58 Minimum bending radius: 20 mm Antenna side M30 Fine thread incline: 1.5 Cable length 3 m Antenna head ANT 30 can be connected on electronics side Figure 5-32 MOBY E 24 Antenna head ANT 18 can be connected on electronics side Figure 5-31 ANT 12 17 Antenna head ANT 12 can be connected on electronics side Figure 5-30 MOBY E MOBY E ANT 30 43 Side view of the antenna head Dimensioned drawing of the ANT 30 Note The length of the line between antenna and evaluation unit is 3 m. The length cannot be changed. Caution The antenna must not be removed in an energized state. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 5-21 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Cores to the SLG 75 Notes on mounting for split toroidal cores Connect the 2 split toroidal cores included with the SLG 75 (order number 6GT2 398-1AF00) just behind the ASM plug connector if you are using standard SLG stub lines (see table 5-10) or cables which have made youself. 1. Close the plastic ferrite shells over the connecting cable. 2. Secure the ferrite shells using a cable binder to prevent them slipping (see Figure 5-33) Table 5-10 Standard connecting cables which will take split toroidal cores Connecting cables Ordering number SLG 75 - ASM 400/424/454 6GT2 091-0A...1 6GT2 091-2A...1 SLG 75 - ASM 410 6GT2 091-0D...1 6GT2 091-2D...1 SLG 75 - ASM 450/452/473 6GT2 091-1C...1 6GT2 091-2C...1 SLG 75 - ASM 470/475 6GT2 091-0E...1 6GT2 091-2E...1 1 For cable lengths, see chap. 3.7.4. Cable binder ASM connector Split toroidal cores Figure 5-33 ASM 450 connecting cables with split toroidal cores (example) Note If your cables have diameters greater than 8 mm, please contact Customer Support: 5-22 Telephone: +49 (180) 5050-222 Fax: +49 (180) 5050-223 E-Mail: adsupport@siemens.com Internet: http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Notes on mounting for round cores It may be necessary to install the included round cores on the antenna lines (ANT 1, ANT 4, ANT 12, ANT 18, ANT 30) under certain conditions: When several antennas are mounted close together When several antennas interfere with each other due to coupling via metallic structures (see chap. 3.4.3) In this case, the round cores must be installed as shown in figure 5-34 directly behind the plug connector of the antenna line. The cores prevent common-mode currents, among others, and ensure interference-free operation. Round cores SLG 75 Antenna line Figure 5-34 Antenna line with round cores Note When serveral SLG 75s are connected to one ASM, the antenna cables (ANT 1, ANT 4, ANT 12, ANT 18, ANT 30) of the individual SLGs must be installed separately from each other to prevent interference in communication. Bundled installation of the antenna cables may cause communication problems. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 5-23 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas 5.4 SLA 71 Application area Ordering data The SLA 71 is a read/write antenna in the middle of the performance range. It permits greater distances to the evaluation unit (ASM). The length of the line between antenna and evaluation unit is 55 m (max.). The SLA 71 can be connected to the following: ASM 724 and ASM 754. Figure 5-35 Read/write antenna SLA 71 Table 5-11 Ordering data for the SLA 71 Read/write antenna SLA 71 6GT2 301-2BB00 Accessories: Technical data Standard connecting cable between SLA 71 ASM 724 and ASM 754; length 5 m (not included with the product) 6GT2 391-1AH50 Extension for antenna line 6GT2 391-1AH50 Length 25 m 6GT2 391-1BN25 Table 5-12 Technical data of the SLA 71 Inductive interface to MDS 5-24 Read/write distances (SLG - MDS), max. 100 mm (see field data) Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Serial interface to ASM RS 422 Data transmission speed 106 kbps Line length to ASM, max. 55 m Voltage (only via ASM) 12 V DC Current consumption at room temperature 160 mA (typical) MTBF (at +40 C) 1 x 105 hours MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Table 5-12 Technical data of the SLA 71 Housing Dimensions without connecting cable (L x W x H in mm) 75 x 75 x 20 Color Anthracite Material Polyamide 12 Connector 0.5 m cable with 8-pin M12 connector (pin on device side) Protection rating in accordance with EN 60529 Shock in accordance with EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum, type II 30 g1 Vibration in accordance with EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2 5g 10 g Mounting of the SLA 71 2 M5 screws Tightening torque at 20 C 2 Nm Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage -25 C to +70 C -40 C to +85 C Weight without connecting cable (approx.) 150 g 1 Field data IP67 Warning: Table 5-13 (9 to 200 Hz)1 (200 to 500 Hz)1 The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not occur continuously. Field data of SLA 71 Working distance (Sa) 10 to 70 mm Limit distance (Sg) 100 mm Diameter of the transmission window (Ld) Depends on MDS Minimum distance from SLA to SLA (D) Da > 800 mm MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 5-25 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas Transmission window MDS OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO Transmission window Sa Sg Side view SLA 71 Top view L (Sa,max) = Ld L (Sa, min) 1 Figure 5-36 Metal-free space 1 The transmission window may be larger at Sa, min. Transmission window of the SLA 71 Metal-free space with flush mounting a = 40 mm Metal a a a a h = 20 mm (non-metallic base) Figure 5-37 5-26 Metal-free space for SLA 71 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas FCC information Made in Germany SIEMENS MOBY E SLA 71 FCC ID: NXWMOBYE-SLA71 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Definition of the distance D Da SLA 71 SLA 71 Db Da 800 mm Db 800 mm SLA 71 Figure 5-38 Distance D: SLA 71 Dimensions (in mm) Cable length: 0.5 m 5 20 75 Figure 5-39 Dimensioned drawing of SLA 71 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 5-27 Read/Write Devices - Read/Write Antennas 5-28 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6 6-1 Interfaces 6.1 Introduction Application area ASM interfaces provide the link between MOBY E components (i.e. SLGs/ SLAs and MDSs) and higher level controllers (e.g., SIMATIC S 5/S7), PCs or computers. Up to four SLGs/SLAs can be connected depending on the interface used. Layout and functions An ASM consists of a microcontroller system with its own program stored on a PROM. The CPU receives commands via the user interface and stores these in the RAM. The user receives an acknowledgment that the command has arrived. When the command is correct, the CPU begins execution. Overview Table 6-1 ASM type Overview of the interfaces Interfaces to PC/computer Interfaces to SLG/ SLA ASM 400 Can be installed in S5-115-155U 9-pin subminiature D socket ASM 410 Can be installed in S5-100U/ ET 200U Can be connected via bus module ASM 424 RS 232 RS 422 9-pin subminiature D socket ASM 450 To PROFIBUS DP (screw connection) ASM 452 Function blocks FB 250/ 230/252 SLG/ SLA connections Dimensions (WxHxD in mm) 1 per CM 4 per ASM Temperature range (during operation) Protection Rating 0 to +55C IP00 2 (multiplex) 45 x 135 x 100 0 to +60C IP20 4 (parallel) 205 x 130 x 60 -25 to +55 C IP40 2 5-pin FC 46 proximity FB 240 switch connectors 2 (multiplex) 134 x 110 x 55 0 to +55C IP67 PROFIBUS DPV1 2 5-pin FC 45 proximity switch connectors 2 (quasiparallel) 134 x 110 x 55 0 to +55C IP67 ASM 454 PROFIBUS DPV1 9-pin subminiature D socket FC 45 4 (parallel) 205 x 130 x 60 -25 to +55 C IP40 ASM 456 PROFIBUS DPV1 2 8-pin M12 connector socket FC 45 FB 45 FC 55 FB 55 2 (parallel) 60 x 210 x 54 resp. 79 0 to +55 C IP67 ASM 470 Can be installed in S7-300/ ET 200M Via screw terminals FC 47 FB 47 2 (multiplex) 40 x 125 x 120 0 to +60C IP20 6-2 MOBY API MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Table 6-1 Overview of the interfaces ASM type Interfaces to PC/computer Interfaces to SLG/ SLA Function blocks Temperature range (during operation) Protection Rating ASM 473 Connectable to the ET 200X 2 5-pin FC 45 proximity switch connectors 1 87 x 110 x 55 0 to +55C IP67 ASM 475 Can be installed in S7-300/ ET 200M Via screw terminals FC 45 2 (parallel) 40 x 125 x 120 0 to +60C IP20 ASM 724 RS 232/RS 422 (9-pin subminiature D socket) 9-pin subminiature D socket MOBY API 4 x SLA (multiplex) 205 x 130 x 60 -25 to +55 C IP40 ASM 754 PROFIBUS DPV1 (9-pin subminiature D socket) 9-pin subminiature D socket FC 45 4 x SLA (multiplex) 205 x 130 x 60 -25 to +55 C IP40 SIM 7x RS 232/RS 422 (15-pin subminiature D connector) Integrated 3964R driver MOBY API C-lib --- 160 x 80 x 40 (without ext. ANT) -25 to +70 C IP67 (with special connector) MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 SLG/ SLA connections Dimensions (WxHxD in mm) 6-3 Interfaces 6.2 ASM 400 6.2.1 Overview Application area ASM 400/401 interfaces can be directly installed and operated in the following SIMATIC S5 programmable controllers. S5-115U/F (all CPUs) S5-135 U/F (all CPUs) S5-155U/H (all CPUs) Configuration and functions The ASM 400 interface modules consist of the basic module in double-height Eurocard format and the CM 422 channel module. The basic module can be configured with one to four channel modules. Mixed configuration is not permitted. The ASM 400 interface module with the CM 422 works in the SIMATIC S5 I/O area. A maximum of 32 channel modules can be used with the FB 250 function block in one SIMATIC (this corresponds to eight four-channel interface modules). When the FB 252 is used, the maximum number of channel submodules is increased from 32 to 96 per SIMATIC S5. All MDS models can be processed via the FBs. The user addresses the data on the MDS via a command table in the data block. The user addresses user data via absolute addresses. Note To achieve optimal transmission times, the length of the block should not exceed 150 bytes per command. 6-4 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces ASM 400 with channel submodule CM 422 SLG SLG MDS MDS Figure 6-1 Communication between ASM 400 and user program SLG MDS SLG MDS Configurator of ASM 400 Communication time between ASM 400 and user depends on two factors. Cycle time and type of programmable controller Software used (i.e. FB 250) Communication between ASM 400 and user can be divided into three steps. The user issues a command and starts it. The next time the FB is called, the command is transferred to the ASM and acknowledged by the ASM. The ASM executes the command with the MDS. The user and the FB are in wait status. Data communication with the MDS begins as soon as an MDS enters the transmission window of the SLG. The MDS data are stored intermediately on the ASM and checked for correctness. ASM communication with the MDS is concluded. When the FB is called the next time, the data which have been read or written are transferred from the ASM to the user. The user receives a finished message. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-5 Interfaces Ordering data Table 6-2 Ordering data for the ASM 400 Order No. ASM 400 interface consisting of a basic module and CM 422 channel submodule Basic module with connection to STG, with 4 slide-in slots for CM 422 channel module, without channel module 6GT2 002-0AA00 CM 422 channel module 6GT2 002-0AB00 Connector, ASM side, 9-pin subminiature D connector (pins) with screw-type terminal for plug-in line between an ASM 400 and SLG/STG 1 unit 1 pack (10 units) 6GT2 090-0BB00 6GT2 090-0BB10 Connector, 2-pin connector with screw-type terminal for plug-in line up to 1.5 mm in diameter for 24 V DC connection (included with the ASM 400) MOBY software1 with FB230/240/250 6GT2 080-2AA10 Plug-in lines and accessories See Section 3.7 Description of ASM 400/401 German English Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD Description FB 250 for ASM 400 German English Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD 1 6-6 6GT2 090-0NA00 See Section 7.1 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Technical data Table 6-3 Technical data of the ASM 400 CM 422 Channel module Serial interface to SLG RS 422 Connector 9-pin subminiature D socket Max. interface/line length RS 422/1000 m, depending on SLG type SLG which can be connected 1 SLG per CM Software functions Programming With STEP 5 function block FB 250 Commands Read data, write data, initialize MDS Access directly via addresses Supply voltage 5/24 V DC via internal bus Interfaces ASM 400 Interfaces for CM/SLG ASM 400 (max.) 4 CM 422 Interface to STG 4F RS 422, 9-pin subminiature D socket Interface for 24 V DC 2-pin connector (included) Supply voltage Nominal value 5/24 V DC Perm. range Internal (at 5 V) 4.75 to 5.25 V DC External (at 24 V) 20 to 30 V DC Max. current consumption internal (at 5 V) External (at 24 V) Fine-wire fuse 1 channel 2 channels 3 channels 4 channels 370 mA 490 mA 610 mA 730 mA 1 channel 2 channels 3 channels 4 channels 400 mA 800 mA 1200 mA 1600 mA M 1.25 A/250 V Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Rel. humidity at 25 C Space requirements Approximate weight ASM 400 CM 422 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 0 to +55 C -20 to +70 C < 95 % 1 SEP (1 SEP = 15.24 mm) 0.44 kg 0.1 kg 6-7 Interfaces Function block FB 250 Function block FB 250 controls data transmission between the STEP5 program and the ASM 400 interface module. FB 250 can be used on the following "programmable controllers." 115U/F 135U-R/S 155U/H FB 250 does not use system commands. All MDSs can be processed with FB 250. Primary functions of FB 250 Convert data from user parameterization structure to structure of an ASM All communication with the ASM via command data exchange Error handling: command repetition; Preparation of errors for the user Chaining of several partial commands into one complete command Reading and writing with a user command Any address areas of a mobile data memory can be processed with one command. Control of PLC cycle load via the user Data transmission between FB and MDS can be subdivided into three phases. Supply interface with the appropriate command and the data or parameter Transmit the data between ASM 400 and MDS Supply S5 with appropriate parameters or data from the interface When the P address area is available, FB 252 also supports operation of the ASM 400 in the expanded Q address area. 6-8 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces 6.2.2 Hardware Description Connectors and their assignment Metal front panel Connector for the service and test device (STG) 3 LEDs per channel: Red LED Yellow LED Green LED Channel module No. 1 9-pin subminiature D socket Connector assignment to the SLG and STG Pin Channel module No. 2 Screws for attaching the channel module to the basic module for EMC operation Channel module No. 3 Designation 1 Not used 2 + Sending 3 +Receiving 4 Not used 5 - Receiving 6 - Sending 7 Ground (0 V) 8 + 24 V 9 Not used Housing Cable shield Connector for the SLG 9-pin subminiature D connector with screw-type attachment Order no.: 6GT2090-0BB00 Channel module No. 4 + 24 V GND Figure 6-2 24 V connector (this connector is included with the ASM) Connectors and their assignment for the ASM 400 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-9 Interfaces Switches and plug-in jumpers IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII IIIIIIIIIII Switch 4 1 2 OFF = 0 ON = 1 X20 OFF = 0 ON = 1 8 1 4 1 Address settings 1 x Switch 1 Figure 6-3 8 Switch 2 Switch 3 Connector for SIMATIC bus Switches and plug-in jumpers for the ASM 400 S4 = setting the addressing mode S2 = setting the page frame number S3 = setting the module address (linear addressing with PESP) S1 = address setting without PESP Table 6-4 Address settings for ASM 400 with FB 250/252 FB 250 parameterization ASM 400 switch setting Start address of ASM 6-10 x 1 and 2 must always be jumped in the case of X20 Switch S3 4321 Switch S4 21 ADR FB 252 parameterization KAN* QADR KAN 0 0000 01 0 1-4 16 0001 16 32 0010 48 0011 64 0100 (Corresponds to channel module 1 to 4) 80 0101 96 0110 112 0111 128 1000 This setting i off switch 4 must always be b used when the module d l iis operated in stand d dard mode. 144 32 Not available 48 64 80 96 112 128 1-4 128 1001 144 144 160 1010 160 176 1011 176 192 1100 192 (Corresponds to channel module 1 to 4) 208 1101 208 208 224 1110 224 224 240 1111 240 240 160 176 192 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Settings on the channel module Hybrid for serial interface CM422 for ASM 400 Plug-in jumper X20 X21 removed CPU 80C32 EPROM Plug-in jumper X20: Removed: normal mode Inserted: test mode; dialog to the mobile data memory is aborted earlier when malfunctions occur. This helps to pinpoint weak spots and malfunctions during commissioning. Figure 6-4 Settings on the channel module MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-11 Interfaces 6.2.3 SIMATIC S5 Configuration Module rack CR 700-0LA (S5-115U) Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400 (order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11) Figure 6-5 Module rack CR 700-0LA (S5-115U) Module rack CR 700-0LB (S5-115U) Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400 (order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11) Figure 6-6 Module rack CR 700-0LB (S5-115U) Module rack CR 700-1 (S5-115U) Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400 (order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11) Figure 6-7 6-12 Module rack CR 700-1 (S5-115U) MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Module rack CR 700-2 (S5-115U) Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400 (order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11) Figure 6-8 Module rack CR 700-2 (S5-115U) Module rack CR 700-3 (S5-115U) Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400 (order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11) Figure 6-9 Module rack ER 700-0; Rack ER 701-1 and ER 701-2 Module rack CR 700-3 (S5-115U) MOBY interface modules ASM 400 cannot be plugged in. Module rack ER 701-3 Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 4001 AS 314, AS 310, IM 317 IM 307 or IM 317 (only as of ER 701-3LA13) 1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400 (order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11) Figure 6-10 Module rack ER 701-3 (S5-115U) MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-13 Interfaces Central controller S5-135U/ -155U Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 Figure 6-11 Central controller S5-135U/ -155U Central controller S5-155U/ -155H Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 Figure 6-12 Central controller S5-155U/-155H Expansion unit EG S5-183U Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 Interface 312-3 Interface 310 or 314 Figure 6-13 6-14 Expansion unit EG S5-183U for S5-135U/-155U MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Expansion unit EG S5-184U Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 Interface 312-5 Figure 6-14 Expansion unit EG S5-184U for S5-135U/-155U Expansion unit EG S5-185U Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 Interface 314 Figure 6-15 Expansion unit EG S5-185U for S5-135U/-155U/-155H Expansion unit EG S5-187U Slot designation MOBY interface module ASM 400 Interface 312-5 Figure 6-16 Expansion unit EG S5-187U for S5-135U/-155U MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-15 Interfaces 6.3 ASM 410 Application area The ASM 410 interface can be used in the SIMATIC with the following: S5-90U (max. 2) S5-95U (max. 4) S5-100U (max. 8) ET 100U (max. 2) ET 200U (max. 4) This ASM can be used with all mobile data memories, read/write devices and the STG service test device. Compatibility with all MOBY components is ensured. Layout and function LEDs for status and error indications are located on the front. Interferenceimmune design is provided by the galvanic isolation of the MOBY interface to the SIMATIC S5 bus. The MOBY commands are started and data are fetched by setting and scanning a few control bits in the process image (PIO/ PII), and eight input/output bytes are assigned. In time-multiplex operation, one or two SLGs can be used. The MDS data are accessed via their absolute addresses. Bus module of PLC S5-100U with ASM 410 STG SIEMENS SIEMENS SLG SLG MDS Figure 6-17 6-16 MDS Configurator for ASM 410 in SIMATIC S5 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Ordering data Table 6-5 Ordering data for the ASM 410 Order No. ASM 410 interface 6GT2 002-0BA00 SIMATIC S5, bus module Screw-type connection Crimp connection, with crimp contacts, increased EMC resistance 6ES5 700-8MA11 6ES5 700-8MA22 Plug-in lines and accessories See Section 3.7 Description - ASM 410 German English Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-17 Interfaces Technical data Table 6-6 Technical data of the ASM 410 Serial interface to the SLG Max. connection RS 422 2 SLGs can be connected via a separate bus module Line length/type, max. 1000 m/RS 422, depending on the SLG and cable type SLG which can be connected Static operation p Dynamic operation 2 SLG 7x Interface to STG RS 422, 9-pin subminiature D connector Interface for 24 V DC is fed via a separate bus module 1 SLG 7x Software functions P Programming i With STEP 5 directly di tl via i process iimage ((PIO/PII); ); no function block required; q ; 5 bytes processed per command Commands Select channel 1 or 2, 2 read MDS, MDS write MDS, initialize MDS, etc. Supply voltage 24 V DC (residual ripple, max. of 10%) 20 to 30 V DC Nominal value Permissible range Current consumption Internal (at 5 V) typical 20 to 60 mA (20 mA = long cycle time) (60 mA = short cycle time) 110 mA (PLC in STOP) max. External (at 24 V DC) All SLGs turned off 90 mA Typical T i l power consumption ti off the th SLG (without SLG) See SLG ddescription S i ti 2.5 W Cooling Convection cooling Isolation group C in accordance with VDE 0110 Protection P t ti rating ti iin accordance d with ith EN 60529 IP20 Mech. stress IEC 68-2-27 Ambient temperature During operation Horizontal H i l iinstallation ll i off SIMATIC Vertical installation of SIMATIC 0 to +60 60 C During transportation and storage -25 to +70 C C Weight (approx.) 6-18 0 to +40 C 0.25 kg MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Slots in the PLC S5-90U The PLC S5-90U has a maximum of four slots available for additional modules. Up to two of these can be used by the ASM 410 module. Slots in PLC S5-95U ASM 410 in PLC S5-95U can only be operated with PLC S5-95U in slots 0 to 7. Up to four modules can be used on one PLC. Starting with CPU release status -8MA-3, 8 modules can be used. Slot on the S5-100U PLC The ASM 410 in the S5-100U PLC can only be operated on slots 0 to 7. Up to eight modules can be used on one PLC. See the following table for slotoriented addressing. S5-100U 0 1 2 3 4 5 64 to 71 72 to 79 80 to 87 88 96 104 112 120 to to to to to 95 103 111 119 127 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6 7 8 Slot number Address assignment Free slots for additional digital modules 6-19 Interfaces Configuration of ASM 410 in ET 100U The ASM 410 must be operated as an analog module in the ET 100U. When parameterizing the module with the "COM ET 100U" software, the module must be specified with "4AX" in the appropriate slot. The ASM 410 occupies eight input bytes and eight output bytes (= 16 bytes). Since a maximum of 32 bytes can be assigned per ET 100U in the address image of the main controller, a maximum of two modules per ET 100U are permitted. When other modules are used with an ET 100U in addition to the ASM 410, only one module can be connected. On the ET 100U, the ASM 410 can be addressed via all address areas of the PLC (P, Q, IM3 and IM4). SIMATIC C P U Central controller: S5115 U S5135 U S5155 U ET 100U Cable length max. 3000 m max. 2 ASM 410 per ET 100U ASM 410 ET 100U DI DO DO max. 32 ET 100U Figure 6-18 Configuration of ASM 410 in ET 200U Configurator for ASM 410 in ET 100U The ASM 410 can be used with the ET 200U under the following conditions. The ET 200U with an ASM 410 installed must be operated in "slow mode". See ET 200U manual for how to set "slow mode". The "COM ET 200U" software is used to parameterize the ASM 410. The ASM 410 module must be parameterized there with "095". Up to four ASM 410s can be used with one ET 200U. When DI/DO or other periphery is used with the ET 200U, fewer ASM 410s can be used. Otherwise the same conditions as for the ET 100U apply. 6-20 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Physical layout The ASM 410 interface has the same dimensions as any standard module for the SIMATIC S5-100U. The interface can be installed directly on the bus module (6ES5 700-8MA11 or 6ES5 700-8MA22). Ventilation slits of the adapter capsule. Make sure that the ventilation slits are not covered during operation. Forced ventilation of the module is not necessary. Label insert; short texts in English are on the back. LEDs 1A 2A 3A B1 B2 B3 Error Active ANW 1.SLG 2.SLG Power 1 2 3 Mode 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Status and error LEDs A B Operating mode selection switch 6 8 A 4 C 2 0 E normal ECC Test mode. Test+ECC INIT norm INIT ECC res. res. Connector for serial S5 bus TEST 8 1.SLG or. 2.SLG 9 res. F 5 9 6 9-pin subminiature D connector for STG with stub line 6GT2 091-0B... (screw-type attachment) 1 STG Coding pin (not visible; on back of module) in position "h" (i.e. analog module) 6 Interface module MOBYE 10-pin connector for bus module (24 V supply; SLG connection) 6GT2 002-0BA00 1 Figure 6-19 2 3 4 5 6 ASM 410 interface with operational and indicator elements MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-21 Interfaces Table 6-7 No. Status and error LEDs of ASM 410 Color Meaning 1A Red Error: The last command was concluded with an error, or the hardware of the module is defective. 2A Yellow Rapid irregular flashing indicates running dialog with the SLG or mobile data memory (MDS). This LED is always on when the presence check is enabled. 3A Green Data memory is in the field of the SLG. The SLG which detected the MDS is indicated via LEDs B1-B2. LED is only active when presence check is being used. B1 Green B1 = 1. SLG is in operation Note: Only one of the B1 or B2 LEDs can be on at once. If both LEDs are on, check the wiring to the SLG. B2 Green B2 = 2. SLG is in operation Note: Only one of the B1 or B2 LEDs can be on at once. If both LEDs are on, check the wiring to the SLG. B3 Green B3 = power on This LED is always on when 24 V is applied to the module. The interface module can be tested with the STG. Setting the operating mode The operating mode is set with the operating mode selection switch on the front of the ASM. Position 0 to 7 Setting the operating mode: The ASM 410 works with the serial S5 bus; the STG interface is switched off. Position 8 to F Test mode with the STG: Message frames from the S5 are no longer processed (not in the case of MOBY E). Note The serial S5 bus functions are not affected by switching to test operation since this interface has its own microprocessor and is not dependent on MOBY activities. 6-22 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Table 6-8 Switch setting Operating modes for ASM 410 Short description on label insert Meaning 0 normal Normal operation Read and write all MDS types; EEC driver is enabled. 11 ECC driver Read and write all MDS types; The ECC driver is enabled. 2 Test operation All MDS types can be processed during test operation. The ASM 410 performs stricter error checks for communication with the MDS. This helps to pinpoint weak spots and malfunctions at commissioning. 31 Test + ECC The ECC driver is enabled. Otherwise same as switch setting 2. 4 INIT normal Initializes the MDS. When a write command is started via the process image, an INIT command to the MDS is started. The contents of the MDS are deleted. 51 INIT ECC Initializes the MDS with ECC driver. Otherwise same as switch setting 4. 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 81 Test of 1st or 2nd SLG 9 to F Reserved 1 An STG can be connected via the 9-pin subminiature D connector. You can use this to test the entire hardware. Do not use switch positions 1, 3, 5 and 8 with MOBY E. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-23 Interfaces Wiring of one or two SLGs BUS MODULE Mounting rail 1 3 5 7 9 2 4 6 8 10 Connecting terminal plate on the bus module Cable shield Shield + 24 V Grn 0V Ye Color coding3 in the case of the plug-in line supplied by Siemens Wh Br Pi From the external power supply Gr 1st SLG max. cable length = 1000 m 1 Grn Ye Wh Br Pi Gr 2nd sLG Plug-in line incl. SLG connector and open end with wire end ferrules 6GT2 091-0D...2 1 2 3 The maximum cable length depends on the connected SLG and on the tolerance of the external 24V supply. Cable lengths, see Section 3.7.4. Color coding gn = green = pin 4 on SLG connector; ge= yellow = pin 5 on SLG connector; ws = white = pin 6 on SLG connector; br = brown = pin 1 on SLG connector; rs = pink = pin 2 on SLG connector; gr = gray = pin 3 on SLG connector Figure 6-20 6-24 Wiring of one or two SLGs for ASM 410 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces 6.4 ASM 450/452 Application area The ASM 450/452 interfaces are modules for the operation of MOBY components on the following systems via PROFIBUS DP / DPV1: All computers and PCs All controllers When the interfaces are used on a SIMATIC S7, function blocks are available to the user. Figure 6-21 ASM 450 ASM 450/452 interface Data can be accessed directly in the MDS by means of physical addresses using the ASM 450. The ASM 450 works with the function block FB 240 (S5) or FC 44 (S7) in cyclic operation. The description of FC 44 (appendix) must be read by the SIMATIC S5 user. All other users must read the description of the FC 44 function for the ASM 450. Up to 2 SLGs can be connected to one ASM 450. Connection of two SLGs is only recommended when static operation is used. When MDSs are processed while passing by (i.e. dynamic operation), there is usually not enough time to switch over the second SLG. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-25 Interfaces ASM 452 The ASM 452 represents a logical step up from the well known ASM 450 interface module. You can achieve optimum data throughput even with large PROFIBUS configurations by using acyclic data exchange on the PROFIBUS DPV1. The minimum cyclical data load of the ASM 452 on PROFIBUS ensures for the user that other PROFIBUS stations (e.g. DI/DO) will continue to be processed very quickly. Up to 2 SLGs can be operated on the ASM 452 in quasi-parallel mode. In quasiparallel mode the user can start a command (via the FC 45) in parallel on 2 SLGs although the ASM only has one serial channel. The ASM automatically accepts multiplex operation between the SLG 1 and SLG 2. The SLG on which an MDS is currently located is processed. This delays the processing of the second MDS. It is therefore recommended you only process the MDS statically when 2 SLGs are connected to it. The MDS data are accessed by means of the physical addressing of the MDS. FC 45 is available for this in SIMATIC S7. FC 45 provides the S7 user with an easy-to-use interface with powerful commands (processing of a complete MDS with one command, command chaining, S7 data structures via UDTs). Ordering data Table 6-9 Ordering data for the ASM 450/452 ASM 450 interface module for PROFIBUS DP Max. of 2 SLGs connectable 6GT2 002-0EB00 ASM 452 interface module for PROFIBUS DPV1 max. 2 SLGs connectable 6GT2 002-0EB20 Accessories Connector for PROFIBUS DP connection and 24 V supply 6ES7 194-1AA01-0XA0 Connecting cable ASM 450/452 SLG length 2 m; Standard: additional lengths See Section 3.7.4 6GT2 091-1CH20 Opt. connector ASM 450/452 SLG 6GT2 090-0BC00 M12 screw caps for unused SLG connection (ASM 450 and ASM 452 only) 1 pack = 10 units 3RX9 802-0AA0 Software MOBY1 with FB 240, FC 44, FC 45, DDB file 6GT2 080-2AA10 Additional accessories for the ASM 450 (network components) See the SIMATIC catalog ST 70 and SIMATIC ET 200X manual Replacement part: Connector plate; T functionality for PROFIBUS connection Description - ASM 450/FC 44 German English French Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD Description of FC 45 (for ASM 452) German English French Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD 1 6-26 6ES7 194-1FC00-0XA0 See Section 7.1 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Technical data Table 6-10 Technical data of the ASM 450/452 ASM 450 ASM 452 Serial interface to user PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DPV1 Procedure after EN 50170 Vol. 2, PROFIBUS Connection PG 11 screw connection PROFIBUS and power supply connectors are not included. Transmission speed 9600 bps to 12 Mbps (automatic recognition) Max. block length 208 bytes 2 words (cyclic)/ 240 bytes (acyclic) Serial interface to SLG Connector 2 coupling connectors (M12) Line length (max.) 1000 m, depends on SLG (2 m = standard length, other cables made: 5 m, 10 m, 20 m) SLG which can be connected 2 SLG 7x (multiplex operation) 2x SLG 7x (quasi-parallel operation) Software functions Programming Depends on PROFIBUS DP master Function blocks for SIMATIC S5 FB 240 - SIMATIC S7 FC 44 FC 45 MDS addressing Direct access via addresses Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS, and so on Supply voltage Nominal value 24 V DC Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption max. 180 mA; typ. 130 mA (without SLG, DO not loaded) MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-27 Interfaces Table 6-10 Technical data of the ASM 450/452 ASM 450 ASM 452 Digital inputs Number 2 Galvanic isolation Yes Input voltage for L i l "0" Logical Logical "1" 1 0 tto 5 V DC 13 to 30 V DC Input current for signal "1" typ. 7 mA Delay time < 10 ms None Digital outputs Number 2 Galvanic isolation Yes Max. permissible current Short-circuit protection 0.5 A Yes; electronic Line length (max.) 30 m Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage 0 to +55 C -40 to +70 C Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm 134 x 110 x 55 (without bus connector) Mounting 4 M5 screws; mounting on any plate or wall Weight (approx.) 0.5 kg Protection rating in accordance with EN 60529 IP67 MTBF (at 40 C) 30 104 hours = 34 years 6-28 None MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces AT-comp. PC PROFIBUS DP master module (e.g. S7-400 CPU) To other PROFIBUS nodes 2 m* PROFIBUS line 24 V for ASM and SLGs 2nd SLG * standard cable length Figure 6-22 MDS 1st SLG MDS Configurator for ASM 450/452 Hardware description The ASM 450/452 has the same housing as the ET 200X distributed I/O device. General information on the ASM 450/452 (for example, mounting, operation, wiring, and general technical specifications) can be found in the ET 200X manual (order no. 6ES7 198-8FA00-8AA0). Accessories and power supply components are also described in this manual. PROFIBUS configuration The ASM 450/452 is integrated in the hardware configuration by means of a DDB file. The ASM can then be configured using SIMATIC Manager's HWCONFIG or another PROFIBUS tool. The MOBY software contains a DDB file for each ASM version. SLG connection method An SLG always occupies two M12 connection sockets on the ASM 450/452. To ensure the simplest SLG connection, use a preprepared cable (see Figure 6-24 and Section 3.7). The standard version of the connecting cable is 2 m in length (for other cable lengths: see Section 3.7.4). An SLG connector with screw-type terminals is available for users who want to make their own cable (see Figure 6-23). Cables and SLG connectors can be ordered from the MOBY catalog. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-29 Interfaces Connector hood removed SLG cable: 6GT2 090-0A PG 11 screw connection, max. cable diameter = 6.5 mm (do not tighten screw until connector is assembled) 2 screws to open the connector 50 Connector pin 18.5 IP67 degree of protection Coupling connector M12 on ASM 450 5 6 S S 1 2 3 4 Core color Connection to pin of SLG connector 1 Green 4 2 White 6 3 Brown 1 4 Yellow 5 5 Gray 3 6 Pink 2 S - (nc) - S Shield Connector ASM 450/452/473 SLG (6GT2 090-0BC00) Figure 6-23 SLG connector (socket) Two 5-pin, round M12 connectors 2m* 25 X1/2 X1/3 X1/1 18.5 X1/4 X1 X2 X2/3 X2/1 * standard length Figure 6-24 6-30 White Brown Green Yellow Gray Pink 6 1 4 5 3 2 X1/5 X2/5 Connecting cable ASM 450/452/473 SLG (6GT2 091-1CH20) MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces PROFIBUS cable with 24 V supply The ASM 450/452 can also be operated with the "green" PROFIBUS cable. Make sure that a 24 V cable leads from X12 to X13. The 24 V cable can be connected to pin 5 or 6 in connector X12. X12 X13 Figure 6-25 X12 X11 X13 X11 PROFIBUS cable with 24 V supply MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-31 Interfaces SLG and DI/DO configuration for ASM 450/452 Config Connector x1 x2 x3 x4 2nd 3rd 4th 5. * x1 - x2 SLG - SLG 2xDO SLG x3 - x4 - SLG 2xDI SLG SLG Config Connector * Figure 6-26 1st 1st 2nd 3. * x1 - x2 SLG - SLG x3 - x4 - SLG SLG Only static processing of the MDS is permissible in this configuration SLG and DI/DO configuration for ASM 450/452 The versions shown in Figure 6-26 can be set up with the standard cables of MOBY or ET 200X. Note The configuration with 2 SLGs + DI + DO is also possible with the ASM 450. However, it requires customer-specific wiring of the components. The following figure shows the dimensioned drawing of an ASM 450/452 with bus connectors. You must add the length of the PG screw connection and the radius of the cable used to the total width and depth specified. 110 53,5 28,25 Dimensioned drawing of the ASM 450/452 with mounting holes O 5.5 120 134 Figure 6-27 6-32 90 Dimensioned drawing of the ASM 450/452 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Pin assignments The following figure shows the pin assignment of the ASM 450/452. LEDs for PROFIBUS DP ASM 450 4 56 X11 SF BF 12 3 4 56 X1 2 1 X12 ON 24 V DC SLG 1 X2 SF: System Fault (see Table 6-11) BF: Bus Fault (see Table 6-11) ON: On when the logic voltage is present on the ASM (is generated from the 24 V supply voltage) 24 V DC: On when the 24 V supply voltage is connected to the ASM. 3 RxD 5 4 PRE/ERR1 LEDs for MOBY and ASM 450 PRE/ERR2 12 3 4 56 X3 SLG 2 X13 X4 RxD: ANW: ERR: RxD SLG1/2: 12 3 DE0/1 : ASM 452 LEDs for MOBY and ASM 452 4 56 X11 SF BF ON 24 V DC 12 3 4 56 X1 X12 SLG 1 2 1 4 X2 3 RxD 5 PRE/ERR 1 PRE/ERR 2 12 3 4 56 X3 X13 SLG 2 X4 RxD 12 3 Pin Allocation Socket X11 and X12 (PROFIBUS DP) X13 (supply voltage) SLG active MDS present and status of DO1 Error display and status of DO0 Indicates the selected SLG. Only SLG 1 or SLG 2 can be selected. Status of the digital inputs 1 2 3* 4 5* 6* Signal B (red) PE PE Signal A (green) L+ M 1 2 3 4 5 6 PE L+ M PE L+ M RxD: SLG with active command PRE/ERR 1, MDS present or error display PRE/ERR 2: For each SLG (the "MDS present" display always has priority. The error display only occurs when there is no MDS present.) MDS present : The LED is permanently ON. If there is more than one MDS in the field, the number of MDS is indicated by short breaks in the light. There is no error output. Error display: The LED is permanently OFF. The last error number is indicated by a short light pulse. SLG 1: SLG 1 is selected. SLG 2: SLG 2 is selected. Only SLG 1 or SLG 2 can be selected. Socket X1/X3 Pin assignment (SLG) 1 2 3 4 5 +RxD +TxD -TxD -RxD PE 1 2 3 4 5 X2 +24 V DO1 0V DO0 PE X2/X4 X4 + 24 V DI1 0V DI0 PE * Do not wire Figure 6-28 Pin assignment and LEDs of the ASM 450/452 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-33 Interfaces PROFIBUS diagnostics Table 6-11 LED "BF" LED "SF" On * The following table lists the possible error displays, what they mean and how to eliminate the cause of the fault. LEDs for PROFIBUS diagnostics Cause ASM 450/452 is starting up. The connection to the DP master has failed. The ASM 450/452 cannot detect a trans- Error handling: - Check the PROFIBUS DP connection. Check the DP master. mission rate. Bus interruption DP master is out of operation Check all the cables in your PROFIBUS DP network. Check whether the PROFIBUS DP connector is plugged in correctly on the ASM 450/452. Flashes Flashes On The configuration data sent from the DP master to the ASM 450/452 do not correspond to the configuration of the ASM 450/452. Off mission rate but is not addressed by the DP master. * Flashes (input/output, PROFIBUS address). Correct DDB file used? - SIEM804C.GSD for ASM 450 - SIEM80B6.GSD for ASM 452 The ASM 450/452 has detected the trans- Check the PROFIBUS address set in the The ASM 450/452 was not configured. On Check the configuration of the ASM 450/452 There is a hardware defect in the ASM 450/452. ASM 450/452 or in the configuration software. Check the configuration of the ASM 450/452 (station type). Replace the ASM 450/452. Status is not relevant 6-34 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Example for bared lengths The following figure shows an example of bared lengths. The lengths are valid for all cables which you can connect to the connector. Any shield braiding must be twisted, inserted in a core end sleeve, and the excess cut off. 45 IIIII IIIII IIIII Twisted and trimmed shield braiding 6 Figure 6-29 PROFIBUS address and terminating resistor Length of baring for a PROFIBUS cable The connector plate of the ASM must be removed before you canset the PROFIBUS address or turn on the terminating resistor. The connector plate covers the DIPswitches. The following figure shows the location of the DIPswitches on the ASM and a sample setting of each. Example:Terminating resistor switched off (status on delivery) on off Example: PROFIBUS address 120 (status on delivery) 23 +24 + 25 + 26 = 8 + 16 + 32 + 64 = 120 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 6-30 ASM 450 ASM 452 n. c. Normal operation (Use DDB file SIEM80B6) n. c. ASM 451-compatible (use DDB file SIEM804D) Setting the PROFIBUS address and circuiting the terminating resistance Note The PROFIBUS address on the ASM 450/452 must always correspond to the PROFIBUS address specified for this ASM in the configuration software. For correct functioning of the terminating resistor, always switch both DIPswitches of the terminating resistor to "on" or "off". MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-35 Interfaces 6.5 ASM 454/424 Application area The ASM 454/424 interfaces are designed for distributed configurations in assembly lines. The robust and attractive housing can be mounted anywhere. Up to four write/read devices in the MOBY E range can be connected and run in parallel. This ensures dynamic operation of the connected SLGs. The user has a choice of two interfaces. PROFIBUS DPV1 (ASM 454) RS 232; serial interface for the PC (ASM 424) Figure 6-31 ASM 454 ASM 454/424 interface Data can be accessed directly in the MDS by means of physical addresses using the ASM 454. Communication to the user is by means of the acyclic PROFIBUS DPV1 protocol service. The function FC 45 is available to SIMATIC S7 users as a simple means of integration. The description of the PROFIBUS DPV1 implementation (see appendix of FC 45 description) is available to programmers of controllers of other manufacturers. ASM 424 6-36 Data can be accessed directly in the by means of physical addresses using the ASM 424. Communication with the user is via a serial RS 232 interface using the 3964R protocol. This makes it easy to connect PCs and controllers of other manufacturers to the MOBY E identification system. A C library (MOBY API) is available to PC users for their applications. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Ordering data Table 6-12 Ordering data for the ASM 454/424 ASM 454 interface for the operation of MOBY E components via PROFIBUS DPV1, without filehandler 6GT2 002-2EE00 ASM 424 interface With serial RS 232/RS 422 interface; 3964R procedure for PC, SICOMP and controllers of other manufacturers 6GT2 002-2CE00 Accessories RS 232 plug-in line between PC ASM 424 Can be made to a maximum length of 32 m (see Section 3.7.4) 6GT2 391-0B... SLG plug-in line (see Section 3.7) 6GT2 091-0A... Connector for power supply (socket) for ASM 454/424 6GT2 390-1AB00 Adapter floor plate for top-hat rail mounting 6GT2 390-0BA00 Wide-range power supply unit 100-230 V AC/24 V DC; 2.2 A (without 24 V cable) 6GT2 494-0AA00 24 V DC plug-in line for wide-range power supply unit 6GT2 494-0AA00 (see Section 7.2) Length: 5 m 6GT2 491-1HH50 PROFIBUS connector 9-pin subminiature D connector for 2 plug-in lines 6ES7 972-0BA11-0XA0 (for other connectors, see catalog ST 70 or IK PI) MOBY software1 with C library for the ASM 424 (MOBY API) and FC 45, DDB file for the ASM 454 6GT2 080-2AA10 Description of FC 45 (for the ASM 454) German English French Description of MOBY API (C library for the ASM 424) German English 1 Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD See Section 7.1 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-37 Interfaces Technical data Table 6-13 Technical data of the ASM 454/424 ASM 454 ASM 424 Serial interface to user PROFIBUS DPV1 RS 232/RS 422 Max. cable length See PROFIBUS configuration. 30/500 m Procedure/protocol EN 50170 Vol. 2, PROFIBUS 3964R Connection 9-pin submin. D socket (screw-type attachment) Transmission speed 9600 bps to 12 Mbps (automatic recognition) 38.4 kbps Max. block length 4 words (cyclic)/238 bytes (acyclic) 238 bytes Serial interface to SLG 4 x 9-pin submin. D socket (screw-type attachment) Cable length Max. of 1000 m SLG-dependent (see Section 3.7) SLG which can be connec- 4 x SLG 7x (parallel operation) ted Software functions Programming Depends on PROFIBUS DPV1 master MOBY API: C-Lib for PCs with Windows 98/NT Function block SIMATIC S7 FC 45 - MDS addressing Direct access via addresses Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS Supply voltage Connector 4-pin, M12 round connector (pin) Nominal value 24 V DC Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption (max.) 250 mA (without SLG) Max. current consumption 1.1 A (without SLG) UL/CSA Yes, in connection with a power supply of NEC Class 2 Ambient temperature D i operation During ti During transportation and storage -25 25 to t +55 55 C ((no condensation) d ti ) -40 to +85 C C (no condensation) Housing 6-38 Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm 205 x 130 x 60 (without connector) Material Aluminum Color Anthracite MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Table 6-13 Technical data of the ASM 454/424 ASM 454 Mounting 4 M5 screws Optional: top-hat rail mounting Tightening torque 3 Nm Weight (approx.) 1300 g Protection rating in accordance with EN 60529 IP40 (higher rating on request) MTBF (at 40 C) 1 105 hours ASM 424 6GT2 491-1HH50 24 V= 230 V PROFIBUS: Connector = 6ES7 972-0BA11-0XA0 6GT2 494-0AA00 or other 24 V connection RS 232: PC-cable = 6GT2 391-0B... RS 422: Make cable as in Figure 6-34 6GT2 091-0A... Figure 6-32 SLG SLG SLG SLG MDS MDS MDS MDS Configurator for the ASM 454/424 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-39 Interfaces Pin assignment and switches RxD PRE ERR Connector 1 to 4 to the SLG Socket Designation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Not used + Sending +Receiving Not used - Receiving - Sending Ground (0 V) + 24 V Not used Cable shield Housing RxD: SLG with command active PRE: "Presence" indicates the presence of an MDS in the transmission window ERR: Error indicated by flashing LED (under preparation) Figure 6-33 Serial interfaces of the ASM 454/424 to the SLG PROFIBUS SERIAL ON: (green) 24 V are applied to the ASM SF/BF: (red) System fault/bus Fault RAM error ASM 424: flashes after power up; flashing stops after the first correct message frame 24 V DC SF/BF ON ACT: (green) ACT This LED flashes once briefly when a command has finished being processed. ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 24 VDC 8 9 10 11 12 Pin Switch 1 to 7: PROFIBUS address Switch 1 ON:20 Switch 2 ON: 21 1 : Switch 7 ON: 26 Example: PROFIBUS-Address= 84 (22 + 24 + 26) 2 Switch 8: Interface ON: RS 422 OFF: RS 232 6-40 3 4 1 2 3 4 Designation Ground + 24 V + 24 V Ground PROFIBUS1 Socket 1 2 3 4 5 6 Designation Not used Not used B-line (red) Request to send (RTS) Ground 5 V (M5) Potential 5 V (floating; 60 mA) Not used A-line (green) Not used Cable shield SERIAL 2 Only in the case of the ASM 454 Only in the case of the ASM 424 Figure 6-34 1 7 8 9 Housing Switch 9 to 12: free 1 2 2 Socket RS 232 RS 422 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Housing Not used TxD (send) RxD (receive) Not used Ground (0 V) Not used Not used Not used Not used Cable shield Not used -TxD -RxD Not used Ground Not used Not used +TxD +RxD Cable shield Serial interfaces of the ASM 454/424 to the user MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Dimensioned drawing with mounting holes 129 205 Figure 6-35 Dimensioned drawing of the ASM 454/424 Adapter floor plate for top-hat rail mounting Item 3 Quantity 1 Floor plate 1 2 Profile section 1 3 Oval head screw (M5 x 10) 4 4 Washer (A5.3) 4 5 Countersunk screw (M4 x 10) 2 4 5 Designation 1 2 Figure 6-36 How to mount the adapter plate Note The profile section (item 2) can be turned by 90 on the floor plate before mounting if the situation requires it. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-41 Interfaces 6.6 ASM 456 6.6.1 Description Area of application The ASM 456 interface modules are slave modules for operating MOBY components via the PROFIBUS DP/DPV1 on any control systems. Figure 6-37 Interface module ASM 456 with M12, 7/8" or ECOFAST connection block When operating the interface module on a SIMATIC S7, convenient function modules are made available to the user. Features 6-42 The ASM 456 replaces the ASM 452 in terms of functionality and provides a simplified connection system. You can continue to use the user software from ASM 452. Optimum data throughput can be achieved through acyclic data traffic on the PROFIBUS DPV1 even when using large PROFIBUS configurations. The minimum cyclic data load of the ASM 456 on the PROFIBUS provides the user with the guarantee that other PROFIBUS consumers (e.g. DI/DO) can still be processed at great speed. Up to 2 read/write devices (SLG) can be operated in parallel on the ASM 456. The user can start a command in parallel on 2 SLGs (via the corresponding FB/FC). MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces The mobile data memory (MDS) data is accessed by means of physical addressing of the MDS. In SIMATIC S7, the FB/FC 45 is available for this purpose. The FB/FC 45 provides the S7 user with a easy-to-use interface with powerful commands (processing one complete MDS with one command; command linking; S7 data structures via UDTs). Other features Degree of protection IP67 System integration with ECOFAST or M12, 7/8" concept T functionality, that is, a component can be replaced without adversely affecting other modules with regard to bus communication and voltage supply. Standardized PROFIBUS user interface for identification systems with PIB (Proxy Ident Function Block; with later firmware version). Firmware update PROFIBUS interface module up to 12 Mbit/s with automatic transfer rate detection Parameterizable device-related diagnostics data with text display Support for I&M functionality (a mechanism for reading out information via the module and saving system information such as function, installation date, installation location, and comments.) MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-43 Interfaces Design The ASM 456 has the same housing as the distributed I/O system ET 200eco. The ASM has a connection block for connecting up to the PROFIBUS DP which is available in ECOFAST version or M12, 7/8" version optionally. X1 MOBY ASM 456 The following figure shows the basic design of the ASM 456. Connector socket for 1st SLG Status LEDs for operation of the 1st SLG Connector socket for 2nd SLG X2 Status LEDs for operation of the 2nd SLG Status LEDs for interface module 6GT2002-0ED00 Space for connection block Protective Earth Figure 6-38 6-44 Basic design of the ASM 456 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Integration The following figure shows how the ASM 456 is integrated in an automation system. PROFIBUS DP Master module e. g. S7-400 CPU ASM 456 X1 X2 X1 X2 2 m* PROFIBUS cable 24 V for ASM 456 and SLGs to other PROFIBUS bus nodes 2. SLG 1. SLG MDS MDS * Standard cable length Figure 6-39 Configurator ASM 456 The ASM 456 is integrated into the hardware configuration by means of a GSD file. The ASM can then be configured using the hardware configuration of the SIMATIC manager or another PROFIBUS tool (e.g. operating mode). The GSD file can be found on the "Software MOBY" CD or on the Internet. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-45 Interfaces 6.6.2 Setting the PROFIBUS Address Features The PROFIBUS address defines the address at which the ASM 456 distributed I/O system is found on the PROFIBUS DP. Requirements The PROFIBUS DP address for the ASM 456 is set on the connection block. Each address can be assigned only once on the PROFIBUS DP. The PROFIBUS address set must match the PROFIBUS address defined in the configuring software (for the ASM 456). Changes to the PROFIBUS DP address only take effect once the mains have been switched ON on the ASM 456. Tools required for M12, 7/8" connection block 6-46 Socket wrench 14 mm Screwdriver 2.5 mm MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Setting PROFIBUS DP addresses on connection block M12, 7/8" Valid PROFIBUS DP addresses are 1 to 99. 1. Remove the two seal caps from the rotary switches (if necessary, use a 14 mm socket wrench). 2. Set the required PROFIBUS address on the rotary switches using a screwdriver. - Lower rotary switch: 1st position - Upper rotary switch: 10th position 3. Screw the two seal caps back onto the rotary switches (torque: 0.5 to 0.8 Nm). Example x10 x1 PROFIBUS address 92: Position 9 Position 2 x10 x1 Figure 6-40 Rotary switch for PROFIBUS address Setting PROFIBUS addresses on connection block M12, 7/8" MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-47 Interfaces Setting PROFIBUS DP addresses on connection block ECOFAST Valid PROFIBUS DP addresses are 1 to 99. 1. Loosen the screw connection of the configuration plug with the ECOFAST connection block and remove the plug. 1 Figure 6-41 Loosening the configuration plug's screw connection 2. Loosen the screw connection for the cover cap on the configuration plug and remove the latter. 3. Set the PROFIBUS address using the DIL switches. 2 Example: PROFIBUS address 92 22 + 23 + 24 + 26 = 4 + 8 + 16 + 64 = 92 ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Figure 6-42 Setting PROFIBUS address on configuration plug 4. Screw the cover cap back down, plug the configuration plug onto the connection block and screw the configuration plug to the connection block. 6-48 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces 6.6.3 Wiring ASM 456 Wiring ECOFAST connector plugs Table 6-14 Pin 1 The table below contains the connector assignment for the ECOFAST connector plugs: Connection assignment for ECOFAST connector plugs Assignment A PROFIBUS DP signal A B PROFIBUS DP signal B 1 Electronic/encoder supply (1L+) (voltage supply for ASM 456 and SLG) 2 Ground for electronic / encoder supply (1M) 3 Ground for load voltage supply (2M) 4 Load voltage supply (2L+) (unused on ASM 456) View of ECOFAST connector plug (wiring end for supply and loop-through connection) 1 Signal A Signal B g A 1 B 2 3 4 ECOFAST hybrid cable 2L+ 1L+ You will find the assembly instructions in the packaging of the Han Brid Cu cable connector and/or Han Brid Cu cable socket. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-49 Interfaces Wiring M12, 7/8" connector Table 6-15 The tables below contain the connector assignment for the M12, 7/8" connector: Connection assignment for M12 connector (PROFIBUS DP) Pin Assignment 1 Supply positive (P5V2) 1 2 Data line A (RxD / TxD-N) 3 Data reference potential (M5V2) 1 4 Data line B (RxD / TxD-P) 5 Shield View of M12 connector (wiring side) Supply DP1 2 Signal A (green) 1 5 3 4 Shield Signal B (red) Thread Shield Loop-through connection DP2 1 Bus cable (2-core, shielded) Signal A (green) 2 4 5 3 Shield Signal B (red) 1 Can only be used for the M12 terminating resistor. Looping the voltage through to the next connector via a 5-core cable is not permitted. Table 6-16 Pin Connection assignment for 7/8" connector (supply voltages) Assignment 1 Ground for load voltage supply (2M) 2 Ground for electronic / encoder supply (1M) 3 PE 4 Electronic/encoder supply (1L+) (voltage supply for ASM 456 and SLG) 5 Load voltage supply (2L+) (unused on ASM 456) View of 7/8" connector (wiring side) Supplyy X01 1 5 2 4 3 Loop-through connection X02 5 4 1 2 2L+ 1L+ 5-core cable 2L+ 3 1L+ 6-50 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Note When connecting up the supply voltage, we recommend the cable specified in section 6.6.7 (cable 5 x 1.5 mm2 pre-assembled with 7/8" connectors). If you want to assemble the cable yourself, then the conductor cross-section should be 1.5 mm2. Connecting the ASM 456 up to protective earth 1. Isolate the grounding cable and secure the cable lug. 2. Screw the cable lug down to the ASM 456 (M5 retaining bolt). The torque is 3 Nm. Figure 6-43 Connecting the ASM 456 up to protective earth MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-51 Interfaces Connecting SLG to ASM 456 Standard cable l Figure 6-44 Connecting cable ASM 456 SLG; l = 2 m, 5 m l Figure 6-45 Extension cable ASM 456 SLG; l = 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 50 m Maximum cable length The ASM 456 can be operated with any SLG configuration with a maximum cable length of 50 m. Longer connecting cables of up to 1000 m are possible in some instances. The current consumption of the connected SLG must however be taken into account. Sequential arrangement of several sub-sections to form a long section of cable must be avoided due to the additional contact resistances. 6-52 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Customer cable fabricating A SLG connector plug with screw-on clamps is provided for users who want to individually pre-assemble their own cables. Cables and SLG connector plugs can be ordered from the MOBY catalog. You will need cables of the following specifications for self-assembled cables: 7 x 0.25 mm2 LiYC11Y 7 x 0.25 M12 connectors can be obtained from the relevant specialist dealers (e. g. Binder). The pin assignment is listed in the following table. Table 6-17 Pin assignment Socket X1, X2 2 3 1 4 8 7 5 6 Pin Signal 1 +24 V 2 -RxD 3 0V 4 RxD 5 TxD 6 -TxD 7 Free 8 PE / shield MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Core color Note data sheet provided by cable manufacturer f t 6-53 Interfaces 6.6.4 Diagnosis using LEDs MOBY ASM456 The following figure shows details of the LEDs of the ASM 456. X1 ACT_1 PRE_1 SLG 1 RxD_1 ERR_1 ACT_2 PRE_2 SLG 2 X2 RxD_2 ERR_2 PROFIBUS 6GT2002-0ED00 SF Figure 6-46 LEDs of the ASM 456 Table 6-18 Status LEDs for ASM 456 DC 24 V 1 2 ON DC24V Meaning1 LEDs ON BF Lights up when there is logic voltage at the ASM (is generated by the 24 V supply voltage.) Lights up when the 24 V supply voltage is connected to the ASM. ACT_1, ACT_2 The corresponding SLG is active in processing a user command. ERR_1, ERR_2 1 A flashing pattern indicates the last error to occur. PRE_1, PRE_2 2 Indicates the presence of an MDS. RxD_1, RxD_2 Indicates live communication with the SLG. Faults on the SLG may also cause this display to light up. The meaning of the individual flash patterns and the associated fault descriptions can be found in the relevant FB and FC documentation. In multitag mode, this LED uses a flash interval to indicate the number of data media currently within the range of influence of the SLG. 6-54 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Table 6-19 LED display for PROFIBUS diagnosis BF SF On - Cause of error Error handling ASM is in start-up mode. - Connection to DP Master failed. Check the PROFIBUS DP connection. Check the DP Master Check all cables in your PROFIBUS DP net- ASM not detecting a baud rate Bus interrupt work. DP Master not functioning Check whether the connector plugs for the PROFIBUS DP are securely plugged into the ASM. flashes On The project data sent to the ASM by the Check the project for the ASM (input/output, ASM has detected the baud rate, but is Correct GSD file being used? Check the PROFIBUS address set in ASM ASM has not been assigned project Check the project for the ASM (station type). There is a hardware defect in the ASM. Diagnosis available The set PROFIBUS address is incorrect Replace the ASM. Evaluate the diagnostic information. Set the address in the range 1 to 99 and carry DP Master do not match the configuration of the ASM. flashes - not activated by the DP Master. and/or in the project software. plans On flashes Off On On Off PROFIBUS address). or greater than 99. out new ramp-up. - = Status not relevant Other ASM operating modes are indicated by the PRE, ERR, ACT, SF and ON LEDs: - ON SF PRE_1 ERR_1 ACT_1 PRE_2 ERR_2 ACT_2 Description On Off Off Off On Off Off Off Ramp-up active Off On Off On Off Off Off Off Checksum error at ramp-up Off On Off Off Off Off On Off Firmware invalid On On On On On On On On LED test for approximately 4 seconds; otherwise firmware fault Off On Off On On Off On On Checksum error at ramp-up Off On On On On Off On On Checksum error of the firmware Off On On On On On On On External RAM defective Off On On Off On On On On DPC-RAM defective Off On Off On On On On On ID error firmware On - Off 1 x flash every 3 s Off Off 1 x flash every 3 s Off ASM successfully ramped up, waiting for reset command On - - Flashing Rapid flashing - Flashing Rapid flashing Firmware update; alternate flashing of the error LEDs at approximately 1 Hz = not relevant MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-55 Interfaces 6.6.5 Technical data Table 6-20 Technical data of ASM 456 Serial interface to the user PROFIBUS DPV1 Procedure after connection EN 50170 Vol. 2 PROFIBUS M12 and 7/8" technology / ECOFAST Transfer rate 9600 baud to 12 Mbaud (automatic detection ) Block length, max. 2 words cyclic /240 byte acyclic Serial interface to SLG Connector 2x coupling connector M12 Line length, max. 1000 m; depends on SLG; 2 m = standard length; other fabricatable cables = 5 m (up to 1000 m on request) Extenxion cables = 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 50 m Connectable SLG 2x SLG Software functions Programming Function modules for SIMATIC S5 SIMATIC S7 Depending on the PROFIBUS DP Master - FB/FC 45 (normal addressing without multitag) FB/FC 55 (normal addressing with multitag) MDS addressing accessed directly via addresses Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS, etc. Supply voltage: 2 Rated value Permissible range DC 24 V DC 20 V to 30 V Current consumption 1 Max. 800 mA; typ. 80 mA (without SLG) Potential isolation Yes Ambient temperature during operations during transport and storage 0 C to +55 C -40 C to +70 C Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm only ASM 456 ASM 456 with ECOFAST connection block 60 x 210 x 30 60 x 210 x 60 Weight Approx. 210 g Degree of protection IP67 MTBF (at 40 C) 122 years 1 2 The power supply must deliver the required current of up to 800 mA for brief power failures 20 ms. All supply voltages and signal voltages must be protective low level voltage (SELV/PELV acc. to EN 60950) 24V DC supply: fused (electrical) isolation of low level voltage (SELV/PELV acc. to EN 60950) 6-56 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces 6.6.6 Dimensional drawings The following figure shows the dimensional drawing of an ASM 456 with bus connection block. 28 x1 x1 210 210 x2 MOBY ASM 456 MOBY ASM 456 28 x2 x10 x1 60 42.1 53.9 60 38.5 53 59.85 79 with connection block M12, 7/8" Figure 6-47 with connection block ECOFAST Dimensional drawing of ASM 456 (in mm) MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-57 Interfaces 6.6.7 Table 6-21 Ordering data Ordering data of ASM 456 6GT2 002-0ED00 Interface ASM 456 for PROFIBUS DPV1, max. 2 SLG can be connected up Accessories for ECOFAST connection: 6ES7 194-3AA00-0AA0 Connection block ECOFAST PROFIBUS ECOFAST hybrid plug 180 with pin insert (5 per pack) with socket insert (5 per pack) 6GK1 905-0CA00 PROFIBUS ECOFAST termination plug with terminating resistor 6GK1 905-0DA10 ECOFAST hybrid cable (pre-assembled) 6XV1 830-7B... 1 ECOFAST hybrid cable (not pre-assembled, sold by the meter) 6XV1 830-7AH10 6GK1 905-0CB00 Accessories for M12 7/8" connection: Connection block M12 6ES7 194-3AA00-0BA0 M12 terminal resistor for PROFIBUS (5 per pack) 6GK1 905-0EC00 PROFIBUS cable with pre-assembled M12 connectors 6XV1 830-3D... 1 Cable for supply voltage with pre-assembled 7/8" connectors 6XV1 822-5B... 1 PROFIBUS FC standard non-pre-assembled cable; max. length 1000 m 6VX1 830-0EH10 PROFIBUS M12 connector plug (5 per pack) with pin insert with socket insert 6GK1 905-0EA00 6GK1 905-0EB00 Connector plug 7/8" for supply voltage (5 per pack) with pin insert with socket insert 6GK1 905-0FA00 6GK1 905-0FB00 Accessories for MOBY: Connecting cable ASM SLG See section 3.7.4. 6GT2 091-0FH.. Extension cable ASM SLG See section 3.7.4. 6GT2 891-0F... MOBY Software 2 with FB/FC 45, FB/FC 55, FB/FC 56, GSD file 6GT2 080-2AA10 Other accessories for ASM 456 (network components) ET 200eco manual 6ES7 198-8GA00-8AA0 Description of FB/FC 45 (for ASM 456) German English French 1 2 Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD These cables are available in different lengths. See Catalog IK PI for more details See section 7.1 6-58 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces 6.7 ASM 470/475 Application area The ASM 470 475 interface can be installed in the SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M. It can be used for all MOBY systems. Up to eight ASM 470/475 interface modules can be installed and operated in a single module rack of the SIMATIC S7-300. When a layout with several module racks (maximum of four) is used, the ASM 470/475 can be installed and operated in each of these module racks. In a maximum SIMATIC S7-300 configuration, up to 32 ASMs can be used. The ASMs can also be operated on the ET 200M distributed I/O system on PROFIBUS. This makes operation in an S7-400 environment possible without any problems. Up to 7 ASMs can be run on one ET 200M. Error messages and operational states are indicated with LEDs. Galvanic isolation between the SLG and the SIMATIC S7-300 bus ensures configurations are not susceptible to interference. Figure 6-48 ASM 470 ASM 470/475 interface In multiplex operation, up to two SLGs can be connected to the ASM 470. The FC 47 function ensures simple programming via SIMATIC S7 tools. FC 47 can be used with both the S7-300 and the S7-400. The ET 200M can also be used to operate the ASM 470 in a SIMATIC S5 environment. FB 47 is available for PLCs 115U to 155U. On the hardware side, communication between the ASM 470 and the S7-300 CPU takes place via a 16-byte address area so that up to 12 bytes of user data can be transferred with each read/write command. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-59 Interfaces ASM 475 The ASM 475 with the order number 6GT2 002-0GA10 is a parameterizable module. The basic functions of the module are therefore already defined when the module is configured in HWCONFIG (e.g. normal addressing or filehandler). ASM 475 (normal addressing) The ASM 475 accesses data on the MDS directly by means of physical addresses. The FC 45 function controls operation in a SIMATIC S7. ASM 475 (Filehandler) The filehandler function is not available in MOBY E. The ASM 475 and FC 45 form a unit with which the MDS data can be easily read at optimum speed. A 32 KB MDS memory is read in 24 s almost independently of the S7 cycle time. ASM 470 ASM 475 Shield contact element (6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0) for 2 modules Shield terminal (6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0) 6GT2 091-0E... (see Section 3.7 or Figure 6-51) Figure 6-49 6-60 SLG SLG MDS MDS Configurator for the ASM 470/475 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Ordering data Table 6-22 Ordering data for the ASM 470/475 ASM 470 interface For SIMATIC S7-300; 2 SLG multiplex without a front connector 6GT2 002-0FA10 ASM 475 interface For SIMATIC S7-300; 2 SLG parallel; normal addressing; without a front connector 6GT2 002-0GA10 Accessories: front connector (1x per ASM) 6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0 Shield terminal (1 per SLG cable) 6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0 Shield contact element (1 per 2 ASMs) 6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0 Connecting cable ASM SLG (see Section 3.7.4) 6GT2 091-0E... MOBY software 1 with FC 47, FB 47 for the ASM 470 and FC 45 for the ASM 475 6GT2 080-2AA10 Description of ASM 470/FC 47 for S7 German English Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD Description of ASM 470/FB 47 for S5 German English Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD Description of FC 45 (for ASM 475) German English French 1 Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD See Section 7.1 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-61 Interfaces Technical data Table 6-23 Technical data of the ASM 470/475 ASM 470 ASM 475 P bus; distributed input and output P bus; cyclic and acyclic services Communication 16 bytes I/O 2 words (cyclic); 238 bytes (acyclic) Command buffer in the ASM 1 x 12 bytes per ASM 70 x 238 bytes per SLG ASM type Interface to S7-300 or ET 200M Serial interface to SLG Connector With screw terminals on the front connector The front connector is not included with the product Line length (max.) Ready-made standard cable = 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 50 m (up to 1000 m on request) Supported MOBY systems I/E/F/V I/E/F Connectable SLGs Multiplex operation 2 x SLG Parallel operation 2 x SLG Software functions Programming SIMATIC user: via FC/FB Third-party user: message frame description as in the appendix of the FC description Function block SIMATIC S7 FC 47 FC 45 SIMATIC S5 FB 47 - MDS addressing Direct access via addresses Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS PROFIBUS diagnosis Yes, can be assigned via RESET S7 diagnosis No Yes, can be called via S7 OM Firmware can be loaded No Yes, via S7 OM Supply voltage Nominal value 24 V DC Perm. range 20 V DC to 30 V 20.4 to 28.8 V DC 50 mA 350 mA Max. 600 mA with one SLG Max. 500 mA per connected SLG Current consumption without SLG at U = 24 V DC, max. with connected SLGs Max. 300 mA per SLG if two SLGs are connected Power loss of the module, typically 1W 2W Current consumption from P bus, max. 100 mA 80 mA Galvanic isolation between S7-300 and MOBY Conditional (100 k between S7-300 and 24 V DC) Yes, use a separate power supply unit for the ASM for ungrounded operation 6-62 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Table 6-23 Technical data of the ASM 470/475 ASM type ASM 470 24 V fuse to the SLG Yes, electronic ASM 475 Yes, electronic Ambient temperature During operation Horizontal installation of SIMATIC 0 C to +60 C Vertical installation of SIMATIC 0 C to +40 C During transportation and storage -40 C to +70 C Dimensions in mm (WxHxD) 40 x 125 x 120 Weight (approx.) 0.2 kg MTBF (at 40 C) 1 106 hours Wiring The ASM 470/475 is commissioned with the following steps. Mount module Mount module on the S7-300 mounting rail. See S7-300 manual. Note The CPU of the S7-300 must be switched to STOP status before the module is mounted. ! Warning The S7-300 may only be wired when the voltage is off. Note To ensure interference-free operation of the ASM 475, make sure that the ASM and SIMATIC CPU (or the ASM and IM 153 in the case of the ET 200M) use the same voltage. If not, error indicators which light up on the CPU when the ASM is turned on may not go off. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-63 Interfaces Front panel The following figure shows the front plate of the ASM 470/475 and the inside of the front door with the related terminal assignment diagram. The SLGs must be connected to the ASM as shown in the terminal assignment diagram. MOBY MOBY ASM 470 SF ASM 475 24 V SF 5 VDC ANW ERR_1 S+ Error PRE_1 S- SLG 1 RxD_1 E+ RxD E- 6GT2 002-0FA10 ERR_2 SLG 2 PRE_2 RxD RxD_2 6GT2 002-0GA10 Status and error indicators Figure 6-50 6-64 E+ E- SLG 2 S+ S- ACT_2 Error SLG 1 ACT_1 Active Connection diagram The numbers for the connection are based on connector X1 located on the upper part of the housing. Front plate and inside of the front door of the ASM 470/475 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Display elements on the ASM Table 6-24 Function of the LEDs on the ASM 470/475 ASM 475 ASM 470 Meaning SF SF System fault (hardware error in the ASM ) 24 V 5 V DC 24 V are connected to the ASM and the 5 V voltage in the ASM is okay Active ACT_1, ACT_2 The corresponding SLG is active when a user command is processed. Error ERR_1, ERR_2 A flashing pattern shows the error that occurred last. This indicator can be reset with the parameter Option_1. ANW PRE_1, PRE_2 Indicates the presence of an MDS RxD RxD_1, RxD_2 Indicates current communication with the SLG; interference on the SLG can also cause this indicator to go on. SLG 1, SLG 2 - Indicates the SLG that has been selected by the user command. Only one of the LEDs may be on at a time (multiplex operation). The LEDs PRE, ERR and SF on the ASM 475 indicate additional operating states. Table 6-25 SF Operating states shown by LEDs on the ASM 475 PRE_1 ERR_1 PRE_2 ERR_2 Description, causes, remedy ON OFF/ON ON (perm.) OFF/ON ON (perm.) Hardware is defective (RAM, flash, etc.). ON OFF ON OFF OFF Loader is defective (can only be fixed at the plant). OFF 2 Hz OFF 2 Hz OFF Firmware loading procedure is active or no firmware detected Load firmware Don't turn off ASM during this. OFF 2 Hz 2 Hz 2 Hz 2 Hz Firmware loading terminated with error New start is required Load firmware again Check update files Any 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz Operating system error Turn ASM off/on. OFF OFF 1 flash every 2 s OFF 1 flash every 2 s ASM has started up and is waiting for a RESET (init_run) from the user MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-65 Interfaces Wiring to the SLG The figure below shows a connecting cable between the ASM and SLG. The colors apply to the standard MOBY cable for the ASM 470. See Section 3.7.3. Front connector of the ASM (6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0) 4 (12) Cable with wire end ferrules White Brown 5 (13) Green 6 (14) Yellow 7 (15) Pink 8 (16) Gray 9 (17) SLG connector (socket) 6 1 4 5 2 3 (Shield) Baring of the cable shield Figure 6-51 Wiring from the ASM 470/475 to the SLG (6GT2 091-0E...) Shield connection See Section 3.6 or Figure 6-49. Lightning protection Implement the lightning protection and grounding measures required for your application. Lightning protection measures always require individual consideration of the entire system. Cable made by the customer To ensure EMC, the SLG cable must be led over an S7-300 shield contact element (see Figure 3-47). When customers make their own cables, the shield of the SLG cable must be bared as shown in Figure 6-52. 30 170 Specifications in mm Figure 6-52 6-66 Baring of the cable shield for a cable made by the customer MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Configuration of the ASM for SIMATIC S7 under STEP 7 Note Installation of MOBY requires that functional STEP 7 software has been installed on the PC/PG. Installation and configuration of the ASM 470/475 in the SIMATIC is handled by an installation program. The installation program is included with the "MOBY software" product (6GT2 080-2AA10). Installation The installation files are in the S7_om subdirectory on the MOBY software. Installation is largely automatic once Setup.exe has been called. The specified steps during SETUP must be responded to. Note Note that you have to execute a separate setup for the installation of the ASM 470 and ASM 475. The ASM 470/ 475 module is located in the hardware catalog of HWCONFIG under the following subdirectory for hardware configuration of the SIMATIC S7. SIMATIC 300 SM 300 Spezial-300 MOBY ASM470 MOBY ASM475* 6GT2 002-0GA00 * Type discontinued Figure 6-53 MOBY ASM475 PARAM 6GT2 002-0GA10 ASM 470/475 directory in the hardware catalog MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-67 Interfaces FC 45/47 with sample project You can use the file dearchiving function of SIMATIC Manager to load the FC with a sample project from the relevant subdirectory of "Software MOBY". The sample project is located in the S7PROJ directory of SIMATIC Manager. ASM type 6-68 Directory in MOBY software Project name in SIMATIC Manager Path name in SIMATIC Manager ASM 470 FC 47 ASM470_CPU416 ASM470_C ASM 475 FC 45 MOBY FC45 Moby_f_1 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces 6.8 ASM 473 Application The ASM 473 interface is a MOBY module for the SIMATIC S7. It can be inserted in the ET 200X distributed I/O device and DESINA. Communication from the ET 200X to the user runs via PROFIBUS DPV1. You can use an S7-300 or S7-400 with an integrated PROFIBUS connection as a programmable controller. The ASM 473 supplements the SIMATIC S7 MOBY interface modules ASM 470 and ASM 475. With the IP67 degree of protection, it can be installed and operated directly without an additional protective housing. The data are accessed on the MDS by means of physical addresses. The function FC 45 is available for operation on a SIMATIC S7. The hardware configuration of the ASM 473 is performed with an object manager (OM) integrated in SIMATIC Manager. Other features: Up to 7 ASM 473s can be run in parallel on one ET 200X station. All I/O modules from the ET 200X family can be run parallel to the ASM 473. Figure 6-54 ASM 473 interface MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-69 Interfaces Ordering data Table 6-26 Ordering data for the ASM 473 Interface module ASM 473 6GT2 002-0HA10 Accessories: SLG cable (2 m = standard cable) For additional lengths see Section 3.7.4 6GT2 091-1CH20 Opt. ASM connector without SLG cable (for cable lengths > 20 m) 6GT2 090-0BC00 Software MOBY1 with FC 45 incl. documentation 6GT2 080-2AA10 Description - FC 45 German English French 1 Technical data Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD See Section 7.1 Table 6-27 Technical data of the ASM 473 Interface to ET200X SIMATIC S7 P bus, cyclic/acyclic services Communication 2 words (cyclic)/ 238 bytes (acyclic) Command buffer in ASM 70 x 238 bytes Serial interface to SLG Connector 2 x coupling connectors M12 Line length (max.) 20 m; 2 m (standard cable length) Additional ready-made cables = 5 m, 10 m, 20 m (up to 1000 m on request) Connectable SLGs 1 x SLG 4x Software functions 6-70 Programming Depends on PROFIBUS DP master SIMATIC S7 function block FC 45 MDS addressing Direct access via addresses Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS PROFIBUS diagnosis yes; in accordance with ET 200X basis station S7 diagnosis Yes, can be called via S7 OM Firmware can be loaded yes, via SIMATIC Manager MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Table 6-27 Technical data of the ASM 473 Supply voltage Nominal value 24 V DC Perm. range 20.4 to 28.8 V DC Current consumption From sensor voltage From load voltage (SLG supply) typ. 75 mA Max. 500 mA (or see technical data of the connected SLG) typ. 1.6 W Power loss of the module Digital inputs Via expansion modules from the ET 200X family Digital outputs Via expansion modules from the ET 200X family Ambient temperature During operation 0 C to +55 C During transportation and storage -40 C to +70 C Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm Single device dimensions 87 x 110 x 55 Scaling interval 60 x 110 x 55 Mounting 2 M5 screws (supplied by customer) 2 M3 screws (supplied by device) Protection rating in accordance with EN 60529 IP67 Weight 0.275 kg For information on setup and other general technical data, see the ET 200X manual (order no. 6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0). MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-71 Interfaces Configuration PROFIBUS DP master module; e.g. S7-400 CPU (connection of non-Siemens master under preparation) PROFIBUS cable to all PROFIBUS slaves 2 m (standard cable length) Basic module: BM 141 BM 142 BM 143 BM 147 24 V power for ET 200X electronics and MOBY SLG Figure 6-55 SLG MDS Configurator for the ASM 473 Note The ET 200X differs from the ASM 45x (see Figure 6-22) in that the 24 V must be fed to the PROFIBUS connector and the load voltage connector. See the ET 200X manual. 6-72 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Basic module - prerequisite for operation of the ASM 473 The following table shows the status of the ET 200X basic modules at 10/2002. The functionality of new basic modules is stored in HWCONFIG in SIMATIC Manager. Table 6-28 Prerequisite for operation of the ASM 473 To be operated with the ASM 473 (6GT2 002-0HA00)* To be operated with the ASM 473 PARAM (6GT2 002-0HA10) 6ES7 141-1BF00-0XB0 No No 6ES7 141-1BF00-0AB0 Yes Yes 6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0 No No 6ES7 141-1BF10-0XB0 No No 6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0 Yes Yes 6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0 Yes Yes 6ES7 142-1BD10-0XB0 No No 6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0 No No 6ES7 142-1BD20-0XB0 No No 6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0 Yes Yes 6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0 No yes** 6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0 Yes Yes 6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0 Yes Yes 6ES7 147-1AA00-0XB0 No No 6ES7 147-1AA01-0XB0 No Yes Order number of the ET 200X basic module * Type discontinued ** Prerequisite for operation: please parameterize the module 6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0 in HWCONFIG. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-73 Interfaces A maximum of 7 ASM 473s can be used with one ET 200X. Figure 6-56 Maximum configuration of the ASM 473 on one ET 200X Depending on the PROFIBUS master, up to 123 ET 200X modules can be operated on one PROFIBUS branch. Hardware configuration The ASM 473 is integrated in the hardware configuration of SIMATIC Manager by calling Setup.exe in the data\S7_OM directory on the "Software MOBY" CD. At the moment the ASM 473 cannot be integrated in a non-Siemens master. SLG connection method An SLG always occupies the two M12 connection sockets, X3 and X4, on the ASM 473. To ensure the simplest SLG connection, use a preprepared cable (see Figure 6-24 and Section 3.7). The standard version of the connecting cable has a length of 2 m. Other lengths are available on request. An SLG connector with screw-type terminals is available for users who want to make their own cable (see Figure 6-23). Cables and SLG connectors can be ordered from the MOBY catalog. 6-74 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Pin assignments The following figure shows the pin assignment to the SLG and describes the display elements. Socket Pin assignment (SLG) X3 1 2 3 4 5 +RxD +TxD -TxD -RxD PE X4 1 2 3 4 5 + 24 V n. c. 0V n. c. PE LEDs for PROFIBUS DP General operating LEDs (SF, BF, ON, 24 V DC) are located on the basic module of the ET 200X. LEDs for MOBY RxD: SLG is active with a command PRE: Indicates the presence of an MDS ERR: Error indicated by flashing pattern (see Appendix B.1) The PRE and ERR LEDs indicate other operational states of the ASM. PRE ERR OFF/ON ON (perm.) Hardware is defective (RAM, flash, etc.). ON OFF Loader is defective (can only be fixed at the plant). 2 Hz OFF Firmware loading procedure is active or no firmware detected Load firmware Don't turn off ASM during this. 2 Hz 2 Hz Firmware loading terminated with error New start is required Load firmware again Check update files 5 Hz 5 Hz Operating system error Turn ASM or ET 200X basis station off/on. OFF 1 flash every 2 s ASM has started up and is waiting for a RESET (init_run) from the user. Figure 6-57 Description, causes, remedies Pin assignment and LEDs of the ASM 473 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-75 Interfaces The figure below shows the dimensions for the positions of the holes for the mounting screws for one basic module and one ASM 473 expansion module. 120 n x 60 87 126.8 BM 141/142 110 53,5 28,25 Dimensioned drawing of mounting holes For M5 mounting screw ASM 473 n = number of expansion modules Figure 6-58 6-76 Dimensions for mounting holes for basic and expansion modules MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces 6.9 ASM 724/754 Application area The ASM 724/754 interfaces are designed for the distributed configuration of identification systems for warehousing, logistics, distribution and assembly lines. The robust and functional housing can be mounted almost anywhere. Up to four read/write antennas can be connected and operated in quasi parallel. When more than one SLA 71 is connected, the data are processed sequentially on the device. The MOBY wide-range power pack (6GT2 494-0AA00) can be used to supply the power on the ASM 724 and ASM 754. The read/write antenna (SLA 71) and stub lines must be ordered separately. The user has a choice of two interfaces. PROFIBUS DPV1 (ASM 754) RS 232/RS 422; Serial interface to the PC and PC-compatible controllers (e.g., SICOMP IMC) and to controllers of other manufacturers (ASM 724). Other operating systems on request. Figure 6-59 ASM 724/754 interface ASM 724 The ASM 724 accesses the data on the MDS directly with physical addresses. Communication with the user is handled by a serial RS 232/RS 422 interface with the 3964R protocol. This makes it easy to connect PCs and controllers of other manufacturers to the MOBY E identification system. A C library (MOBY API) with basic functions is available to PC users for their applications (Windows 98/NT 4.0). ASM 754 The ASM 754 accesses the data on the MDS directly with physical addresses. Communication to the user is by means of the acyclic PROFIBUS DPV1 protocol service. The function FC 45 is available to SIMATIC S7-300/400 users as a simple means of integration. The description of the PROFIBUS DPV1 implementation (see the appendix of the FC 45 description) is available to programmers of controllers of other manufacturers. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-77 Interfaces 6GT2 494-0AA00 PROFIBUS master 24 V= S7-300 (FC 45) S7-400 (FC 45) 230 V PROFIBUS DPV1 Other master (non-Siemens FC) 6GT2 491-1HH50 ASM_channel: Figure 6-60 6-78 1 2 3 4 MOBY power supply unit or other 24 V connection 6GT2 391-1AH50 SLA SLA SLA SLA MDS MDS MDS MDS MOBY E SLA 7x and MDS E6xx Configurator for the ASM 724 and ASM 754 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Ordering data Table 6-29 Ordering data for the ASM 724/754 ASM 724 interface With serial RS 232/RS 422 interface; 3964R procedure for PC, SICOMP and controllers of other manufacturers for 4 SLA 71 6GT2 302-2CE00 ASM 754 interfaces for the operation of MOBY E components via PROFIBUS DPV1, without filehandler for 4 SLA 71 6GT2 302-2EE00 Accessories SLA 71 read/write antenna 6GT2 301-2BB00 Standard connecting cable between SLA 71 ASM 724 and ASM 754; Length: 5 m 6GT2 391-1AH50 Extension for antenna line 6GT2 391-1AH50 Length: 10 m 25 m 6GT2 391-1BN10 6GT2 391-1BN25 Extension for antenna line 6GT2 391-1AH50 Length: 25 m 6GT2 391-1BN25 Wide-range power supply unit 100-230 V AC/ 24 V DC; 2.2 A (24 V cable not included with the product) 24 V DC plug-in line for wide-range power supply unit 6GT2 494-0AA00; Length: 5 m 6GT2 494-0AA00 6GT2 491-1HH50 RS 232 plug-in cable between PC and ASM 724; 6GT2 391-0B... (for cable lengths see Section 3.7.4) Connector for power supply (socket) for the ASM 724 and ASM 754 6GT2 390-1AB00 PROFIBUS connector 9-pin subminiature D connector for 2 plug-in lines 6ES7 972-0BA11-0XA0 (for other connectors, see catalog ST 70 or IK PI) Adapter floor plate for top-hat rail mounting of ASM 724/ASM 754 6GT2 390-0BA00 C-library for ASM 724 (MOBY API) On the "Software MOBY" CD (see Section 7.1) FC 45 for ASM 754 On the "Software MOBY" CD (see Section 7.1) Description of FC 45 For ASM 754 programming German English French Description MOBY API (C-Lib for ASM 754) German English MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD Electronically available on "Software MOBY" CD 6-79 Interfaces Technical data Table 6-30 Technical data of the ASM 724/754 ASM 754 ASM 724 Serial interface to user PROFIBUS DPV1 RS 232/RS 422 Max. cable length See PROFIBUS configuration. 30/500 m Procedure/protocol EN 50170 Vol. 2, PROFIBUS 3964R Connection 9-pin submin. D socket (screw-type attachment) Transmission speed 9600 bps to 12 Mbps (automatic recognition) 9.6 kbps 19.2 kbps 38.4 kbps (automatic recognition) Max. block length 4 words (cyclic)/238 bytes (acyclic) 238 bytes Serial interface to the SLA 9-pin submin. D socket (screw-type attachment) Cable length (ASM to SLA) Max. of 55 mm No. of SLAs connectable 4 SLA 71 devices Software functions Programming Depends on PROFIBUS DPV1 master MOBY API: C-Lib for PC with Windows 98/NT 4.0 Function block SIMATIC S7 FC 45 - MDS addressing Direct access via addresses Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS Digital inputs None Digital outputs None Supply voltage Connector 4-pin, M12 round connector (pin) Nominal value 24 V DC Perm. range 20 to 30 V DC Current consumption 250 mA (without SLA) max. current consumption 1.1 A (without SLA) UL/CSA Yes, in connection with a power supply of NEC Class 2 Ambient temperature Operation Transportation and storage -25 to +55 C (no ( condensation)) -40 to +85 C C (no condensation) Housing 6-80 Dimensions (L x W x H) 205 x 130 x 60 (without connector) Material Aluminum Color Anthracite MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Table 6-30 Technical data of the ASM 724/754 ASM 754 Dynamic operation of the ASM 724/754 Mounting 4 M5 screws Optional: top-hat rail mounting Tightening torque (at room temperature) 3 Nm Weight (approx.) 1300 g Protection rating in accordance with EN 60529 IP40 (higher rating on request) Vibration in accordance with EN 60721-3-7/ class 7M2 30 g Vibration in accordance with EN 60721-3-7/ class 7M2 1g 1.5 g MTBF (at +40 C) 1 105 hours Certification CE ASM 724 (9 to 200 Hz) (200 to 500 Hz) The ASM 724/754 is a multi-channel module. The user can operate up to 4 channels in parallel but internally the SLA 71 is controlled by a multiplexer. This operation is also described as quasi-parallel. The ASM 724/754 is therefore not suitable for dynamic operation. If the traversing speed is sufficiently slow, dynamic MDS processing can be considered in individual cases. The following example gives you an idea of how this works. Task: The MDS E624 is to be processed dynamically on 4 SLAs at a traversing speed of 15 m/min. Configuration: ASM 754 with 4 SLA 71s PROFIBUS with 3 Mbps Controller with CPU 315-2 DP Read requirement: One to 16 bytes is to be read as of address 0 on all SLA 71s. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-81 Interfaces Result of the measurements: t(read) = 520 ms This means that in the worst case an MDS must be in the field for 520 ms to ensure that it can be still be read dynamically if 4 SLAs are being operated. If fewer than 4 SLAs are being used on the ASM 754, the time is divided accordingly between the SLAs: * Number of SLAs Time [ms] 4 520 3 390 2 260 1* 130 If only one SLA 71 is inserted on the ASM 724/754, the time is reduced to < 100 ms. If you compare this time with the speed of the MDS or the different MDSs, the result is as follows: Number of SLAs MDS type V max. dyn. [m/s] V max. dyn. [m/min] 4 MDS E624 0.07 4.2 3 MDS E624 0.10 6.0 2 MDS E624 0.15 9.0 1 MDS E624 0.29 17.4 4 MDS E600 0.12 7.2 3 MDS E600 0.15 9.0 2 MDS E600 0.23 13.8 1 MDS E600 0.46 27.6 4 MDS E611 0.15 9.0 3 MDS E611 0.21 12.6 2 MDS E611 0.31 18.6 1 MDS E611 0.62 37.2 Conclusion: Dynamic processing of the MDS E624 on 4 SLA 71s at a speed of 15 m/min is not possible. 6-82 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Pin assignment and switches RxD PRE ERR 1 Connector 1 to 4 to the SLA 2 3 4 Socket Designation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 12 V + Sending +Receiving Not used - Receiving - Sending Ground (0 V) + 24 V Not used Cable shield Housing RxD (yellow): Connection indicator; lights up if the connection to the SLA is working properly PRE (green): "Presence" indicates the presence of an MDS in the transmission window ERR (red): Error indicated by flashing LED (under preparation) Figure 6-61 Serial interfaces of the ASM 724/754 to the SLA 71 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-83 Interfaces ON: 24 V are on the ASM (green) PROFIBUS SERIAL SF/BF: (red) System fault/bus Fault RAM error ASM 724: flashes after power up; flashing stops after the first correct message frame ACT: (green) This LED flashes once briefly when a command has finished being processed. 24 V DC SF/BF ON ACT ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 24 VDC Pin Switch 1 to 7: PROFIBUS-Address 1 Switch 1 ON:20 Switch 2 ON: 21 2 1 3 4 : Switch 7 ON: 26 Example: PROFIBUS-Address= 84 (22 + 24 + 26) Switch 8: Interface 2 ON: RS 422 OFF: RS 232 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Switches 9 to 12: Not used Housing Ground + 24 V + 24 V Ground 1 2 3 4 PROFIBUS Socket Designation 1 Designation Not used Not used B-line (red) Request to send (RTS) Ground 5 V (M5) Potential 5 V (floating; 60 mA) Not used A-line (green) Not used Cable shield SERIAL 2 1 2 Only in the case of the ASM 754. Only in the case of the ASM 724. Figure 6-62 6-84 Socket RS 232 RS 422 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Housing Not used TxD (send) RxD (receive) Not used Ground (0 V) Not used Not used Not used Not used Cable shield Not used -TxD -RxD Not used Ground Not used Not used +TxD +RxD Cable shield Serial interfaces of the ASM 724/754 to the user MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Dimensions (in mm) 130 205 Figure 6-63 Dimensioned drawing of the ASM 724/754 with mounting holes Adapter floor plate for top-hat rail mounting Item 3 Quantity 1 Floor plate 1 2 Profile section 1 3 Oval head screw (M5 x 10) 4 4 Washer (A5.3) 4 5 Countersunk screw (M4 x 10) 2 4 5 Designation 1 2 Figure 6-64 How to mount the adapter plate Note The profile section (item 2) can be turned by 90 on the floor plate before mounting if the situation requires it. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-85 Interfaces 6.10 SIM Serial Interface Module 6.10.1 Overview Application area The primary application areas of the MOBY E SIM are data acquisition, trade and commerce, warehousing, logistics, assembly lines and tool identification. For acquisition support, development and pilot installation, the MIFARE Demokit is available. The serial interface module (SIM) is a universal module for the operation of MOBY E via a serial interface on any Computer PC and Non-Siemens PLC. Its sturdy housing permits use in rugged environments and makes it insensitive to many chemical substances. Layout and function SIM combines an ASM interface and an SLG read/write device in one housing. It is delivered with RS 232 and RS 422 interfaces. The following versions are available for MOBY E. SIM 70 ANT 0 SIM 70 ANT 1 SIM 72 All SIM models are operated with a 3964R procedure. The SIM is connected via a serial interface of the PC (models with processors starting at 80486SX) and run with the 3964R protocol. Driver software is available for the 3964R protocol. C libraries with functions based on the 3964R driver platform are available for fast and easy programming. The use of the C libraries makes it possible to operate the SIM through applications under Windows 95/NT 4.0. Other operating systems on request. 6-86 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces AT-comp. PC C library with 3964R driver RS 232 / RS 422 SIM 72 Connector power pack Siemens MOBY E MDS E611 Figure 6-65 Data structure of the MOBY E data memory MDS E6xx with SIM Configurator for SIM (example) MOBY E MDS E 6xx data memories and the MIFARE card share the same protocol but use different access keys. MDS E6xx and MIFARE have different access keys. The MDS has an 8-kbit EEPROM memory which is divided into 16 sectors (i.e. sectors 0 to 15). Each sector consists of four blocks. The block is 16 bytes in length and is the smallest addressable memory area on the MDS. With one exception, each sector consists of three blocks of user data (i.e. blocks 0 to 2) and a sector trailer (i.e. block 3). Sector 0 is the exception. It contains the card manufacturer data block in block 0 and can only be read-accessed. Access to the MOBY E MDS is protected by two keys (i.e. A and B) per sector with individual access conditions for each block of the sector. These keys and the individual access conditions must be specified and stored in the appropriate sector trailer when the card is personalized. With MOBY E data memories, key A is reserved and is not available for programming. All MOBY E SIMs use this key. Key B is available for user programming. This permits the SIM to be used to access general MIFARE data memories. The transport key is required to switch the SIM to another B key. Which is: 0xB0B1B2B3B4B5. Note Key assignment and access conditions can only be changed with the SIM. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-87 Interfaces 8192-bit EEPROM Manufacturer's data Block 0 User data Block 1 Sector 0 Key A (0) Block 2 Access conditions (0) Block 3 Sector 1 Sector trailer 0 Key B (0) Block 4 User data Block 5 . . . Key A (1) Block 6 Access conditions (1) Block 7 Sector trailer 1 Key B (1) User data Block 60 Block 61 Key A (15) Sector 15 Access conditions (15) Block 62 Block 63 Sector trailer 15 Key B (15) 16 sectors Figure 6-66 6-88 4 blocks per sector = 64 16 bytes per block = 1024 bytes 47 user data blocks = 752 bytes Keys A and B = 6 bytes Access conditions = 4 bytes blocks Data structure of the MOBY E MDS (MIFARE) with SIM MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces The MOBY interface modules which work with the MDS via an SLG (e.g., ASM 400, ASM 450, ASM 470, and so on) only access the user data via addresses. The figure below shows the assignment of the ASM addressing to the block structure of the MDS. ASM Addressing Decimal MDS Structure Hexadecimal Block 0 0 15 0000 000F Block 1 16 31 0010 001F Block 2 Block 3 Manufacturer's data User data Key Access Key Figure 6-67 32 47 0020 002F Block 4 48 63 0030 003F Block 5 64 79 0040 004F Block 6 . . . . . . Block 7 704 719 02C0 02CF Block 60 720 735 02D0 02DF Block 61 Key 736 751 02E0 02EF Block 62 Access Block 63 Key User data Key Access Key User data Assignment of the ASM addressing to the block structure of the MDS Field data of the MDS and SIM The following tables provide the field data of all MOBY E components of MDS and SIM. All technical data are typical data, based on an ambient room temperature of 0 to +50 C, a supply voltage of 22 to 27 V DC, and metal-free surroundings. Tolerances of $20 % are permitted for production conditions and temperature fluctuations. The field data are subject to additional tolerances when the entire voltage range on SIM from 12 to 30 V DC and/or the entire temperature range of MDS and SIM is/are utilized. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-89 Interfaces Table 6-31 Field data of all MDSs and SIMs without the influence of metal MDS MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E6233 MDS E624 SIM Length of the transmission window in mm (L) SIM 70 ANT 0 (Ld) --- --- 4 12 SIM 70 ANT 1 (Ld) 605 805 --- 38 SIM 72 (Lx)2 (Ly)2 755 905 --- 505 605 60 40 Width of the transmission window in mm (W) SIM 70 ANT 0 --- --- 24 5 (12)1 SIM 70 ANT 1 24 32 --- 15 (38)1 30 20 36 24 --- 24 16 (Wx)2 (Wy)2 SIM 72 Working distance in mm (Sa) SIM 70 ANT 0 --- --- 0 to 6 0 to 8 SIM 70 ANT 1 0 to 50 10 to 70 --- 0 to 25 SIM 72 0 to 50 10 to 70 --- 0 to 30 Limit distance in mm (Sg) SIM 70 ANT 0 --- --- 6 15 SIM 70 ANT 1 70 100 --- 40 SIM 72 70 100 --- 40 1 The width (W) contained in parentheses only applies to static MDS operation. 2 See also Figure 6-85 for the field geometry. 3 MDS E623 together with SIM 70 ANT 0 only in static operation 4 5 In static operation, a maximum median deviation of + 2 mm is permitted. Reduction by approx. 15% when the MDS enters the transmission window diagonally. See also Figure 3-1. Note For effects of metal on the transmission window, see Sections 3.4.2 and 3.4.3. Table 6-32 6-90 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS MDS E600 MDS E611 MDS E623 MDS E624 SIM 70 ANT 0 --- --- > 30 mm > 50 mm SIM 70 ANT 1 > 400 mm > 400 mm --- > 250 mm SIM 72 > 400 mm > 400 mm --- > 250 mm MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Table 6-33 Minimum distance from SIM to SIM SIM 70 ANT 0 SIM 70 ANT 1 SIM 72 SIM 70 ANT 0 > 200 mm > 400 mm > 400 mm SIM 70 ANT 1 > 400 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm SIM 72 > 400 mm > 800 mm > 800 mm Note Adherence to the values specified in Table 6-33 is essential. There is a danger of the influence of inductive fields if the values are underranged. This would increase the time for data transmission incalculably or a command would be terminated with errors. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-91 Interfaces 6.10.2 Cable and Connector Allocation The 15-pin subminiature D connector (i.e. pin) is used for the following purposes. The voltage supply of SIM The connection to the PC/computer The connection of the inputs and outputs Table 6-34 Overview of the SIM connector allocation Meaning Pin RS 232 Interface 1 2 3 4 5 6 RS 422 Interface 7 8 14 15 13 12 - - TxD (Transmit Data) RxD (Receive Data) GND (Signal Ground) E1 1 5 Input for interface switchover only 1 9 2 + 24 V 0V (Ground) Not assigned Power supply of the SIM (12 to 30 V) 10 11 0V (Ground) DPA0 3 4 For the power output (Power output 24 V max. 0.5 A resistive load) 4 5 3 6 7 0V (Ground) DI0 1 DO0 2 3 DO1 2 DO2 2 for DA (only with RS 232) D+ (Send) E+ (Receive) D- (Send) E+ (Receive) GND6 (Connect Signal Ground if required) E1 1 5 Input for interface switchover only 0V (Ground) DI0 1 DO0 2 3 DO1 2 --- for DA logical "0": -2 V < log 0 < 5 V / logical "1": 12 V < log 1 < 33 V Signal level and load corresponds to RS 232; Ri min = 3 k (logical "0" = < -5 V to 3 k / logical "1" = 5 V to 3 k) Output DPA0 and DO0 are parallel in function. logical "0": < 2 V to 50 / logical "1": 22 V to 50 RS 232 interface switchover: E1 logical "0"/RS 422: E1 logical "1" Correct recognition requires that GND-SIM and GND-PC be connected with each other. 6-92 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Suggested cabling Shielded data cables must be used. Recommended by Siemens: Standard cable, LiYC11Y, shielded. Wiring varies depending on the ambient conditions and the cable lengths. X Y SIM Only one connecting cable 6- to 15-core; shielded. optional Switch BERO or similar Customer's Distributor box (IP 65) possibly with power supply unit PC connection 4-core; shielded. Figure 6-68 Computer or PC Installation with one connecting cable for rugged environments X Y SIM PC connection 4-core; shielded. optional Switch BERO or similar Computer or PC Power supply 2-core 2-core 24 V DC 230 V AC Figure 6-69 Installation with several connecting cable on the SIM connector MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-93 Interfaces Test cable for DI/DO and power supply, 5 m long (6GT2 391-1DH50) SIM PC SIM PC RS 232 X Y C library with 3964R driver and demo (Table 7-1) Adapter Plug-in power supply (6GT2 090-0HB00) Figure 6-70 6-94 Installation with test cable and plug-in power supply (see Section 3.7.3) MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Voltage supply Table 6-35 Voltage supply of SIM Nominal value 24 V DC Permissible range 12 to 30 V DC Uripple fripple 1 Vss 0 < f < 1 MHz (measured on the SIM connector) Current consumption Starting current 700 mA at 24 V and room temperature Without DO With DO 180 mA 700 mA at 12 V and room temperature Without DO With DO 330 mA 1.03 A The voltage can be supplied via cores of the data cable or via a separate cable. Remember the voltage drop on the supply cable. Check the input voltage on the SIM during commissioning. The permissible cable length is usually shorter than 1000 m. The length depends on the current consumption of SIM and the ohmic resistance of the connecting cable. The following table provides an overview of permissible cable lengths. Table 6-36 Conductor cross-section in mm2 Cable configuration SIM Conductor diameter in mm Resistance in W/km 1 Max. cable length in m 2 DO unloaded DO max. of 500 mA 0.07 0.3 550 40 30 0.2 0.5 185 120 85 0.5 0.8 70 310 230 0.8 1.0 50 440 320 1.5 1.4 24 920 660 1 The resistance values are average values. They refer to the forward and return conductors. A single wire has half the resistance. 2 The output voltage on the power supply unit is 24 V DC; with a supply voltage of 30 V DC the cable lengths increase accordingly. Field with gray background: Recommended by Siemens: standard cable, LiYC11Y, 6 x 0.25, shielded). The cable is available from Siemens under the order number 6GT2 090-0A... MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-95 Interfaces Standard cabling with RS 232 interface SIM Computer Pin assignment for Cable length max. 30 m 25-pin subminiature D connector: 1) 3 TxD 2 RxD 7 GND RxD TxD TxD RxD 2) E1 1 logical "0" Pin 1 Pin 1 9-pin subminiature D connector: 3 TxD 2 RxD 5 GND 1) Apply shield to connector housing 2) Input 1 (pin 12) open = RS 232 interface Figure 6-71 Standard cabling for PC/SIM, RS 232 The SIM has a standard RS 232 (V.24) interface with signal lines on pins 14 and 15. V.24 control lines (e.g. DSR, DTR, RTS, CTS) are not supported by SIM. The data are acknowledged at procedure level. Standard cabling with RS 422 interface SIM Computer Cable length Max. of 1000 m 1) E- TxD D- RxD D+ E+ Pin 1 2nd 1) Apply shield to connector housing 2) Jumper between pin 1 and pin 12 = RS 422 interface Figure 6-72 Standard cabling for PC/SIM, RS 422 The interface switchover from RS 232/RS 422 takes place via the E1 input (pin 12). Logical "0" is RS 232 Logical "1" is RS 422 6-96 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces DI/DO cabling with power supply and interface switchover SIM 230 V AC Switch, BERO 24 V DC + - DPA0 Relay, small power motor, light or similar DI0 E1 1) 1 Imax = 500 mA Cable length max. 100 m (shielded or unshielded) 1) Input 1 (pin 12) is only used for interface switchover and is not available to the user for applications Logical "0" is RS 232 Logical "1" is RS 422 Figure 6-73 DI/DO cabling with power supply ! What should you do if nothing works? Warning If DPA0 (i.e. power output) is used, PIN 10 must be used as ground reference. Otherwise the SIM may be destroyed. a) Check the supply voltage directly on the SIM connector using a measuring instrument. b) Check the cabling to the PC Do the SIM and PC have the same physical interface? Is the polarity of the connecting cable correct (RS 232 and RS 422)? Are the data cables correctly wired? (RxD of the SIM must be connected to TxD of the PC and vice versa) Is the cable shield applied correctly? Error messages Error messages are described in the individual programming guides. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-97 Interfaces 6.10.3 Programming the SIM Module with the 3964R Procedure Telegrams can only be transmitted with the 3964R procedure. This procedure ensures secure data transmission for a point-to-point connection. The following C libraries and programming guides which can be ordered separately are available to the user for the computers. C libraries CCT32 (Windows 95/NT 4.0) Programming guide for CCT32 (Windows 95/NT 4.0) German CCT32 (Windows 95/NT 4.0) English PC users: 3964R driver for Windows 95/NT 4.0 users; works with PC interface 1 and/or 2; four interfaces can be operated with the driver using additional hardware. Can be run on PC models as of 80486SX with a serial interface and a Windows 95/NT 4.0 operating system. The communication specifications are described in the Windows programming guidelines (CCT 32, Windows 95/NT) for computers which do not use Windows (e.g., Unix). Note The MOBY API library is not suitable for the SIM 7x. Interface presetting Parameter Presetting Transmission speed 9600 bit/sec Bits per character 8 data bits Parity Odd Stop bits 1 Priority PC = master Depending on the operating system being used, these interface parameters must be set in the C library using Control Panel (in the case of Windows 95/NT, button: 3964R/Run). 6-98 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces 6.10.4 SIM 70 ANT 0 Ordering data Technical data Figure 6-74 SIM 70 ANT 0 Table 6-37 Ordering data for SIM 70 ANT 0 Serial interface SIM 70 ANT 0 6GT2 305-0AA00 15-pin subminiature D special connector (socket) for IP65 6GT2 390-1AA00 SIM-RS 232 test cable with connection line for DI/DO and connection for power supply (total length of 5 m) 6GT2 391-1DH50 Plug-in power pack, primary: 90 V to 264 V AC secondary: 24 V DC/1250 mA for SIMRS 232 test cable 6GT2 090-0HB00 Software See Section 7.1 Programming guide See appendix A Table 6-38 Technical data of the SIM 70 ANT 0 Serial interface RS 232 and RS 422 Transmission speed 9600 bps Procedure 3964R (C library contains driver for PC) Plug-in connection 15-pin subminiature connector (pin on device side) Data line length, max. 1000 m (shielded), RS 422 30 m (shielded), RS 232 Antenna line length, max. 0.45 m MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-99 Interfaces Table 6-38 Technical data of the SIM 70 ANT 0 Software functions MDS: Read, write, initialize, access rights, multitag (see programming guide) Programming Depends on computer, PC, PLC of other manufacturer The following C libraries are available for the PC. CCT32 (Windows 95/NT 4.0) Digital input Via 15-pin subminiature D connector (Ri = 10 k) Number 1 Input voltage for Logical "0" Logical "1" - 2 V < log 0 < 5 V 1 12 V < log 1 < 33 V 1 Non-floating Yes Digital outputs Via 15-pin subminiature D connector Number 1 (power output) Imax = 500 mA At 24 V (output voltage of 22 V) Input voltage for Logical "0" Logical "1" < 2 V at 50 22 V at 50 (Imax) Galvanic isolation No Short-circuit immunity Yes Inductive interface to the MDS (SLG integrated) Read/write distance, max 15 mm (see field data) Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Supply voltage 24 V DC 12 to 30 V DC 1 Nominal value Permissible range Current consumption at room temperature Without DO Inrush current, brief Operation (at 12 V) Operation (at 24 V) 700 mA, typical 330 mA, typical 180 mA, typical 2.5 x 105 hours MTBF (at +40 C) Housing, dimensions in mm 6-100 for antenna head ( x weight x L) M18 x 1.0 x 50 For electronics without connector (L x W x H) 160 x 80 x 40 Color (Antenna) (SIM housing) Anthracite with orange head Anthracite Material (Antenna) (SIM housing) Crastin Polyamide 12 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Table 6-38 Technical data of the SIM 70 ANT 0 Protection rating in accordance with EN 60529 SIM housing IP65 (using a special plug: 6GT2 390-1AA00) Antenna IP67 (front) (9 to 200 Hz)2 (200 to 500 Hz)2 Vibration in accordance with EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 1g 1.5 g Shock in accordance with EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum, type II 30 g2 Mounting of the SIM 2 M5 screws Tightening torque (at room temperature) 2 Nm Mounting of the antenna 2 plastic nuts, M18 x 1.5 Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage -25 C to +70 C -40 C to +85 C Weight (approx.) 510 g 1 2 Voltage measured on SIM Warning: The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not occur continuously. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-101 Interfaces Definition of distance D Da Db Da 200 mm Db 200 mm The SIM electronics can be mounted directly next to each other. Figure 6-75 Distance D: SIM 70 ANT 0 Dimensions (in mm) Anti-kink cable protector, flexible in all directions Minimum bending radius: 20 mm 52 Cable length 0.45 m 5 Antenna head 50 M18 Fine thread Gradient 1.0 160 5.5 Antenna side MOBY E A 80 Top view of antenna head 26 40 View A 12 Figure 6-76 6-102 24 ANT 0 5 33 Dimensioned drawing of the SIM 70 ANT 0 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Transmission window Ld L (Sa, min) 1 L (Sa, max) = Ld sg sa Top view 1 Side view Figure 6-77 With Sa, min the transmission window can increase in size compared to the standard configuration Transmission window of the SIM 70 ANT 0 Transmission window: The antenna of the MDS must be positioned inside this field to ensure reliable data communication. IIIIII IIIIII IIIIII IIIIII IIIIII a = 10 mm b = 10 mm a MOBY E ANT 0 Metal-free space with flush installation Note: The limit and working distances are reduced when the metal-free space is not adhered to. Figure 6-78 FCC information 10 10 Metal-free space ANT 0 Metal-free space for the SIM 70 ANT 0 Made in Germany SIEMENS MOBY E SIM 70 ANT 0 FCC ID: NXWMOBYE-SIM70ANT0 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-103 Interfaces 6.10.5 SIM 70 ANT 1 Ordering data Technical data 6-104 Figure 6-79 SIM 70 ANT 1 Table 6-39 Ordering data for SIM 70 ANT 1 Serial interface SIM 70 ANT 1 6GT2 305-0AB00 15-pin subminiature D special connector (socket) for IP65 6GT2 390-1AA00 SIM-RS 232 test cable with connection line for DI/DO and connection for power supply (total length of 5 m) 6GT2 391-1DH50 Plug-in power pack, primary: 90 V to 264 V AC secondary: 24 V DC/1250 mA for SIM-RS 232 test cable 6GT2 090-0HB00 Software See Section 7.1 Programming guide See appendix A Table 6-40 Technical data of the SIM 70 ANT 1 Serial interface RS 232 and RS 422 Transmission speed 9600 bps Procedure 3964R (C library contains driver for PC) Plug-in connection 15-pin subminiature connector (pin on device side) Data line length, max. 1000 m (shielded), RS 422 30 m (shielded), RS 232 Antenna line length, max. 0.45 m MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Table 6-40 Technical data of the SIM 70 ANT 1 Software functions MDS: Read, write, initialize, access rights, multitag (see programming guide) Programming Depends on computer, PC, PLC of other manufacturer The following C libraries are available for the PC: CCT32 (Windows 95/NT 4.0) Digital input Via 15-pin subminiature D connector (Ri = 10 k) Number 1 Input voltage for Logical "0" Logical "1" - 2 V < log 0 < 5 V 1 12 V < log 1 < 33 V 1 Non-floating Yes Digital outputs Via 15-pin subminiature D connector Number 1 (power output) Imax = 500 mA At 24 V (output voltage of 22 V) Input voltage for Logical "0" Logical "1" < 2 V at 50 22 V at 50 (Imax) Galvanic isolation No Short-circuit immunity Yes Inductive interface to the MDS (SLG integrated) Read/write distance, max 100 mm (see field data) Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Supply voltage Nominal value Permissible range 24 V DC 12 to 30 V DC 1 Current consumption at room temperature Without DO Inrush current, brief Operation (at 12 V) Operation (at 24 V) 700 mA, typical 330 mA, typical 180 mA, typical 2.5 x 105 hours MTBF (at +40 C) Housing, dimensions in mm For antenna head (L x W x H) 75 x 75 x 20 For electronics without connector (L x W x H) 160 x 80 x 40 Color (Antenna) (SIM housing) Anthracite Anthracite Material (Antenna) (SIM housing) Polyamide 12 Polyamide 12 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-105 Interfaces Table 6-40 Technical data of the SIM 70 ANT 1 Protection rating in accordance with EN 60529 IP65 (using a special plug: 6GT2 390-1AA00) Antenna IP67 (9 to 200 Hz)2 (200 to 500 Hz)2 Vibration in accordance with EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 1g 1.5 g Shock in accordance with EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum, type II 30 g2 Mounting of the SIM 2 M5 screws Mounting of the antenna 2 M5 screws Tightening torque (at room temperature) 2 Nm Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage -25 C to + 70 C -40 C to + 85 C Weight (approx.) 620 g 1 2 Transmission window SIM housing Voltage measured on SIM Warning: The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not occur continuously. OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO Transmission window MDS Sa Sg Side view SIM 70ANT 1 L (Sa,max) = Ld L (Sa, min) 1 Figure 6-80 6-106 Top view 1 With Sa, min the transmission window can increase in size compared to the standard configuration Transmission window of the SIM 70 ANT 1 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Metal-free space Metal-free space with flush mounting a = 40 mm Metal a a a a h = 20 mm (non-metallic base) Figure 6-81 FCC information Metal-free space for SIM 70 ANT 1 Made in Germany SIEMENS MOBY E SIM 70 ANT 1 FCC ID: NXWMOBYE-SIM70ANT1 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-107 Interfaces Definition of distance D Da SIM 70 ANT 1 SIM 70 ANT 1 Db Da > 800 mm Db > 800 mm SIM 70 ANT 1 Figure 6-82 Distance D: SIM 70 ANT 1 Dimensions (in mm) Anti-kink cable protector, flexible in all directions Minimum bending radius: 20 mm 52 5 5.5 Cable length 0.45 m 5 160 5 75 20 5.5 Top view of antenna 5 A 80 40 View A 26 12 Figure 6-83 6-108 33 Dimensioned drawing of the SIM 70 ANT 1 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces 6.10.6 SIM 72 Ordering data Technical data Figure 6-84 SIM 72 Table 6-41 Ordering data for the SIM 72 SIM 72 serial interface 6GT2 305-0CA00 15-pin subminiature D special connector (socket) for IP65 6GT2 390-1AA00 SIM-RS 232 test cable with connection line for DI/DO and connection for power supply (total length of 5 m) 6GT2 391-1DH50 Plug-in power pack, primary: 90 V to 264 V AC secondary: 24 V DC/1250 mA for SIM-RS 232 test cable 6GT2 090-0HB00 Software See Section 7.1 Programming guide See appendix A Table 6-42 Technical data of the SIM 72 Serial interface RS 232 and RS 422 Transmission speed 9600 bps Procedure 3964R (C library contains driver for PC) Plug-in connection 15-pin subminiature connector (pin on device side) Data line length, max. 1000 m (shielded), RS 422 30 m (shielded), RS 232 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-109 Interfaces Table 6-42 Technical data of the SIM 72 Software functions MDS: Read, write, initialize, access rights, multitag (see programming guide) Programming Depends on computer, PC, PLC of other manufacturer The following C libraries are available for the PC: CCT32 (Windows 95/NT 4.0) Digital inputs (Ri = 10 k) Via 15-pin subminiature D connector Number 1 Input voltage for Logical "0" Logical "1" - 2 V < log 0 < 5 V 1 12 V < log 1 < 33 V 1 Non-floating Yes Digital outputs Via 15-pin subminiature D connector Number 1 (power output) Imax = 500 mA At 24 V (output voltage of 22 V) Input voltage for Logical "0" Logical "1" < 2 V at 50 22 V at 50 (Imax) Galvanic isolation No Short-circuit immunity Yes Inductive interface to the MDS (SLG integrated) Read/write distance, max 100 mm (see field data) Transmission frequency 13.56 MHz Supply voltage 24 V DC 12 to 30 V DC 1 Nominal value Permissible range Current consumption at room temperature Without DO Inrush current, brief Operation (at 12 V) Operation (at 24 V) 700 mA, typical 330 mA, typical 180 mA, typical 2.5 x 105 hours MTBF (at +40 C) Housing, dimensions in mm For electronics without connector (L x W x H) 6-110 160 x 80 x 40 Color Anthracite Material Polyamide 12 Protection rating in accordance with EN 60529 IP65 (using a special plug: 6GT2 390-1AA00) Vibration in accordance with EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 1g 1.5 g (9 to 200 Hz)2 (200 to 500 Hz)2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Table 6-42 Technical data of the SIM 72 Shock in accordance with EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2 Total shock response spectrum, type II 30 g2 Mounting of the SIM 2 M5 screws Tightening torque (at room temperature) 2 Nm Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage -25 C to +70 C -40 C to +85 C Weight (approx.) 550 g 1 2 Voltage measured on SIM Warning: The values for shock and vibration are maximum values and must not occur continuously. Transmission window OOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOO Transmission window MDS Side view Sa Sg SIM 72 70 Standard configuration: longitudinal x-axis (Lx) OOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOO M Lx (Sa, max) = Lx Lx (Sa, min) 1 1 Top view Ly (Sa, min) 1 Ly (Sa, max) = Ly With Sa, min the transmission window can increase in size compared to the standard configuration Figure 6-85 Transmission window of the SIM 72 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-111 Interfaces Metal-free space Metal h h = physical height of SIM Metal b b a a a, b = Metal-free distances = 40 mm Figure 6-86 FCC information Metal-free space of the SIM 72 Made in Germany SIEMENS MOBY E SIM 72 FCC ID: NXWMOBYE-SIM72 THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized changes and modifications to this equipment: Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. 6-112 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Interfaces Definition of distance D Da Y SIM 72 Y X SIM 72 X Db Da 800 mm Db 800 mm Y SIM 72 X Figure 6-87 Distance D: SIM 72 Dimensions (in mm) 80 40 5 X 70 Y 160 90 5.5 A 5 View A 26 12 Figure 6-88 33 Dimensioned drawing of the SIM 72 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 6-113 Interfaces 6-114 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Accessories MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 7 7-1 Accessories 7.1 MOBY Software Starting with version 3.0, the "MOBY Software" product is delivered on CD. It includes all function blocks and drivers for MOBY. The "readme" file in the main directory of the CD offers a short description of the programs. FB 240: function block for the ASM 450. MOBY on PROFIBUS DP with SIMATIC S5 (including master device file for PROFIBUS DP). FB 250: function block for the ASM 400. The FB 41 contains a function block for the ASM 410. The FB has an almost identical call interface to the FB 250. When programming, use the description for the FB 250. FC 44 permits the ASM 450 to be used in a SIMATIC S7 environment. Be sure to read the "Read_me" file in the FC 44 directory carefully. The description of FC 44 for ASM 450 is available for operation of ASM 450. FC 45: S7 function for the ASM 754 Function FC 47 for ASM 470 FB 47 contains a function block for the SIMATIC S5 115U - 155U. This enables you to operate the ASM 470 via an ET 200M in a SIMATIC S5 environment. Load program for the ES 030 and a master device file for connecting the ES 030 to PROFIBUS DP Test and demonstrator programs for presenting the functions (such as "read from MDS" or "write to MDS" and so on) on a PC (Windows). The ASM 424/724 and SIM MOBY modules are connected to the PC by a serial interface cable (i.e. COM1 or COM2). Brief explanations of the individual directories in German or English. See "les_mich.txt" or "read_me.txt". 3964R driver for DOS, Windows 95 and Windows NT. C-library CCT32 for Windows 95/NT 4.0. C-library MOBY API for Windows 98/NT 4.0. Current release of MOBY documentation in pdf format. Tools: Useful programs for MOBY configuration. 7-2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Accessories Operator prompting The "Software MOBY" CD has user-friendly operator prompting using HTML. After calling Start.exe, a window appears with the following entries in the upper menu bar: FC for S7 FB for S5 PC Support Documentation Tools Demo News Note on MOBY software and licensing When you buy an interface module or SIM no software or documentation is included with the product. The "MOBY software" CD-ROM, which contains all the available FBs/FCs for SIMATIC, C libraries for Windows 98/NT, demo programs, etc., has to be ordered separately. The CDROM also includes the complete set of MOBY documentation (German, English and French) in PDF format. When you purchase an ASM or SIM interface module, the price for use of the software including documentation on the "MOBY Software" CD-ROM is included. The purchaser is granted the right to make copies (duplication license) as needed for customer applications or system development for the plant. The enclosed contract also applies to the use of software products for a one-off charge. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 7-3 Accessories C-library CCT32 The import library is written in C++. The following functions are supported. Read MDS Initialize MDS Write MDS Password protection and access rights Multi-tag recognition Personalization of the cards (only with the hardware of the MIFARE demo kit) Driver software is available for the 3964R protocol. For a description of the functions, see applicable programming instructions. See also appendix A. In addition, the C library Windows 95/NT contains a simple demo program. C-library MOBY API The import library is written in C++. The following functions are supported. Read MDS Initialize MDS Write MDS Driver software is available for the 3964R protocol. The programming guide is available as a pdf file on the "MOBY Software" CD. Ordering data Table 7-1 Ordering data for MOBY software Order No. MOBY software 7-4 6GT2 080-2AA10 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Accessories 7.2 MOBY Wide-Range Power Supply Description Ordering data The MOBY wide-range power pack is a compact, primary-pulsed power supply. It is designed for use on single-phase, alternating current networks with two DC outputs (socket connector, parallel circuited). Its robust construction features an aluminum housing which gives the finetuned system physical strength while protecting it from electromagnetic interference and providing it with optimal heat dissipation. A built-in current limitation circuit protects the primary-pulsed power supply against overload and ensures continuous short circuit resistance. The integrated overvoltage protection (SIOV) which is standard protects the connected electronics from excessively high voltage. Figure 7-1 MOBY wide-range power supply Table 7-2 Ordering data for the MOBY wide-range power pack Order No. Technical data Wide-range power supply unit MOBY, AC 100 230 V/DC 24 V/2.2 A; including 2 mating connectors for the output voltage 6GT2 494-0AA00 24 V plug-in line for ASM 424, ASM 454, ASM 724, ASM 754; Length 5 m 6GT2 491-1HH50 NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNN Table 7-3 Technical data of the MOBY wide-range power supply Input Input voltage Rated value Range Frequency Input current Efficiency Power supply Power failure bypass Undervoltage switchoff Overvoltage protection MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 100 to 230 V AC 90 to 253 V AC 50/60 Hz 0.85 to 0.45 A 80% at full load 2 m power cable with ground-protected connector 10 ms Yes SIOV 7-5 Accessories Table 7-3 Technical data of the MOBY wide-range power supply Output Nominal output voltage Nominal output current Residual ripple Socket contacts 24 V DC 2.2 A 20 mVss to 160 kHz 50 mVss Greater than 160 kHz NTC Yes Startup current limitation Permanent short-circuit proof Ambient conditions Ambient temperature During operation During transportation and storage Cooling General information Dimensions for power supply incl. mounting plate, (L x W x H) in mm Weight Color Electromagnetic compatibility Emitted interference (EN 50081-1) Noise immunity (EN 50082-2) Safety Certificates and approvals Electrical safety test Primary/secondary isolation Safety class to EN 60950 (VDE 0805) Degree of protection to EN 60529 -20 C to +40 C (max. +60 C; see Safety Guidelines) -40 C to +80 C Convection 205 x 80 x 60 (without connector) Approx. 1000 g anthracite Class B in accordance with EN 55022 EN 61000-4-2 CE, GS EN 60950/VDE 0805 and VDE 106 part 1 4 kV AC I IP65 (only in inserted state) Connector pin assignment 24 V output Output 1 and 2: Figure 7-2 7-6 3 4 2 1 Socket 1: ground (0 V) Socket 2: +24 V DC Socket 3: +24 V DC Socket 4: ground (0 V) Connector pin assignment 24 V output MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Accessories Dimensions (in mm) 7,5 65 80 3 57 205 176 7,5 Figure 7-3 5 5 190 Dimensions of the MOBY wide-range power supply Safety guidelines ! Caution Do not open the devices or modify them. Non-adherence will invalidate CE certification and the manufacturer's warranty. When installing the power pack, adhere to the applicable DIN/VDE regulations of your country. The field of application of the power supply unit is limited to information technology in electrical office equipment within the scope of EN 60950/VDE 0805. A device can only be set up and operated by qualified personnel. For the purposes of the safety notes on this product, qualified personnel are those persons who are authorized to commission, ground and tag devices, systems and electrical circuits in accordance with safety standards. The device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and technical description and only in connection with devices and components recommended by Siemens. If devices and components of other manufacturers are used, they must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Correct operation of the product requires proper storage, setup and mounting, and careful operator control and maintenance. When installing, make sure that the power outlet socket can be easily accessed. During operation, the housing may heat up to +40 C. This is no cause for concern. However, at an ambient temperature of more than +40 C, be sure to cover the power pack so that people cannot touch the hot housing. The power pack must still receive sufficient ventilation. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 7-7 Accessories 7.3 Wide-Range Connector Power Pack The MOBY wide-range connector power pack is designed for use on singlephase alternating current networks with a DC output (socket connector). The primary-pulsed power supply is protected against overload with a built-in current limitation circuit and is permanently immune to short-circuiting. The integrated overvoltage protection protects the connected electronics from excessively high voltages. Technical data 7-8 Table 7-4 Technical data of the wide-range connector power pack Input voltage range 90 V to 264 V AC (wide-range input) Frequency range of the input voltage 47 Hz to 63 Hz Nominal input current 700 mA Nominal output voltage 24 V DC Nominal output current 1.25 A Basic load None Short-circuit immunity Yes Ambient temperature for transportation, storage and operation 0 C to +40 C with 90% humidity, no condensation Power supply dimensions in mm (L x W x H) 105 x 68 x 39 (without connector) Output cable 2 x 0.75 mm / 2 m in length Primary connector can be changed Euro connector, UK connector, USA connector (included) Housing material Plastic (PPEV1) Color Black Weight Approx. 260 g CE Yes UL Yes Interference emission EN 55011, 55014 and 55022/B Interference immunity EN 61000-4-2 to -4-6 Electrical safety test In accordance with EN 60950 Galvanic isolation, primary/secondary 3 kV AC Safety class to EN 60950 (VDE 0805) 2 Protection rating in accordance with EN 60529 IP30 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Accessories Ordering data Table 7-5 Ordering data for the wide-range, plug-in power pack Order No. Wide-range, plug-in power pack, 90 - 264 V AC/24 V DC; 1.25 A 6GT2 090-0HB00 Connecting cable, RS 232 PC SIM 6GT2 391-1DH50 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 7-9 Accessories 7.4 MOBY STG E Hand-Held Terminal Application areas The STG E adds to the MOBY E identification system a powerful mobile hand-held terminal for applications in the areas of logistics, distribution and service. The service and test device (STG E) is an indispensable aid for commissioning and testing. All MOBY E data memories can be read and writeaccessed inductively. Figure 7-4 Setup and function MOBY STG E hand-held terminal The STG E mobile hand-held terminal consists of a basic device (PSION Workabout mx) and a plug-in compact read/write head. It has a housing which is protected against splashed water (IP54), an LCD monitor screen with 240 x 100 pixels, an alphanumeric keyboard and various interfaces (for EEPROM card, charging battery, RS 232/TTL for MOBY E read head, battery charging interface including RS 232 for the PC coupling, and so on). The included MOBY software (memory card) provides service and test functions for reading, writing, etc. of all MOBY E data memories. Read data from the data memory Write data to the data memory Read and display the ID number of the data memory Present and edit the data in hexadecimal or ASCII format Enable/disable password protection Using the optional C library as a basis, it is very easy to program your own applications including a customized screen user interface for reading and writing data memories. Various development tools are available for the PC, and a large selection of accessories is available directly from PSION. New applications are opened up in the area of logistics and distribution (e.g., goods commissioning data can be recorded offline with the hand-held terminal or processed and forwarded to the PC/computer later). 7-10 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Accessories Optional components See http //www.psion.com/industrial/ on the Internet. 3link adapter cable to the PC for easy exchange of data between PC and PSION Workabout mx PSION Workabout mx basic device with large function keys and numeric keyboard Additional memory card with up to 8 Mbytes of memory Docking station including high-speed charging device and software for convenient data exchange between PSION Workabout mx and PC System prerequisites The following prerequisites must be met when the library for SIBO `C' (SIBO `C' is the C developmental environment for the PSION Workabout) is used. PC The C development package for PSION Workabout must be installed on the PC. You can obtain the development package directly from PSION (see: http://www.psion.com/industrial/). Hand-held terminal PSION Workabout with wall attachment and power supply unit. If you prefer, you can use the MOBY STG E hand-held terminal. PC cable You will need a 3-link adapter cable from PSION for the connection to the PC (see: http://www.psion.com/industrial/). The cable is only required if it is not included in the C development package. C library The following files are required: MOBY_E.H, MOBY_STG.LIB. They are delivered with the MOBY SIBO C library from Siemens. Note In principle, applications can also be developed in the Basic programming language OVAL. However, you cannot use the MOBY library. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 7-11 Accessories Hardware The following figure shows the primary hardware interfaces which you can use to write your own applications. TTL interface for use of a MOBY read head RS 232 interface (e.g. connection of a MOBY E-SIM) Graphical LCD screen Cursor control keys; contrast; display illumination; on/off; cursor keys Green LED: on when battery is being charged Additional Flash memory cards for storing large amounts of data Numeric input block with Enter key ASCII keyboard, shift and special function keys (Ctrl, ) LIF interface for connection of PC, printer and so on Figure 7-5 Hardware of the STG E If you are using another type of PSION Workabout, other interfaces are also available. A few examples are listed below. Infrared interface Numeric keyboard and function keys 7-12 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Accessories Ordering data Table 7-6 Ordering data for the STG E STG E mobile hand-held terminal, basic device (PSION Workaboutmx), with MOBY E read/ write head, battery, standard software incl. STG functions on EEPROM card, user's guide, without charging station Charging station for a mobile hand-held terminal with 230 V AC, plug-in power pack 6GT2 303-0AA00 6GT2 303-1DA00 Accessories: Technical data MOBY E read/write head, 13.56 MHz, without software and description 6GT2 303-1AA00 Memory card with STG software and filehandler software for MOBY D/E/F/I/U, incl. user's guide 6GT2 303-1CA00 C-library for MOBY D/E/F/I/U, for development of customer-specific screen dialogs, without development tools, incl. description 6GT2 381-1AB00 Extra battery 6GT2 094-0AB00 or 2 x AA batteries (NiCd, Ni-MH, alkaline) Additional PSION components (e.g., 3link cable and C developmental user interface) Obtainable from local dealers or PSION (http://www.psion.com/industrial/) Table 7-7 Technical data of the STG E hand-held terminal Hardware Processor NEC V30mx 27.68 MHz, 80C86-compatible RAM memory 2 MB; of which approx. 1.8 Mbytes can be used as desired ROM memory 2 Mbytes for operating system User program 1 MB with MOBY service and test program Monitor screen Graphic LCD monitor screen with 240 x 100 pixels, graystage scale, backlighting can be turned on Keyboard Alphanumeric with 57 keys Sound Piezo signal encoder Power supply NiCd battery pack with 2 type-AA cells (850 mAh) High-speed chargeable, automatic switch-off 20 hours (Read head inactive, display not lighted) 4.5 hours (Read head active, display not lighted) 10 hours (Read head inactive, display lighted) Operation time Interfaces LIF interface (LIF = Low Insertion Force) for battery charging and communication with PC and printer (3link cable not included) RS 232 and TTL interface for connection of a MOBY read head Security Locking mechanism for battery and program memory Software MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 7-13 Accessories Table 7-7 Technical data of the STG E hand-held terminal Operating system EPOC/16 multitasking, graphics support, GUI interface, Interpreter similar to MS-DOS File management MS-DOS-compatible Integrated software MOBY service and test program spreadsheet; database; calculator; communication MOBY STG program Read, write, delete MDS, read MDS ID; store and load MDS data; German or English menu language; data input and display in ASCII or HEX Technical data Complete device (incl. ACCUs) Read head Dimensions 260 x 90 x 35 [mm] [ ] 90 x 64 x 35 [mm] [ ] Weight Approx. 440 g Approx. 110 g Temperature Operation: Storage: Relative humidity 0% to 90%, no condensation Protection P i rating i iin accordance with EN 60529 IP54 (protected ( d against i splashed l h d water)) Impact resistance Max. drop on concrete: 1 m EMC EN 55022; FCC Part 15 Low Power Transmitter Electrostatic; El t t ti RF RF; EFT IEC 801-2; 801 2 IEC 801-3; 801 3 IEC 801-4 801 4 -20 C to +60 C -25 C C to +80 C C (without battery) RF read/write head MOBY E Max. read/write di t distances 7-14 13.56 MHz (MIFARE) MDS type Distance in mm E611 E600 E624 E623 E623, installed in metal 30 18 10 5 3 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Accessories 7.5 Acquisition Station ES 030-K Application area Acquisition station ES 030-K is a microprocessor-controlled terminal for general-purpose use in all sectors of industry. It offers several interfaces. This station is particularly suitable for use with the MOBY I, E, L and M identification systems and with barcodes to reduce the load on higher-level host systems. Its modular design permits configuration of functions and design to meet the requirements of individual applications. Features/layout Can be programmed as desired with PG and PC in programming language STEP5 Dialog or process-oriented with keys which can be assigned as desired Sturdy construction (IP54) for industrial environments (e.g., for control even when operator is wearing protective gloves) Flexible hardware layout Serial interfaces; TTY, RS 485, (RS 422), V.24 for connection to higherlevel computers, PLCs or printer with run, 3964R, SINEC L1 and PROFIBUS DP procedures Additional interfaces for MOBY I, MOBY E and MOBY L identification systems, barcode wands, scanners and swipe readers Integrated function blocks for frequently used functions With master/slave function for SINEC L1 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 7-15 Connector 2 Connector 1 PLUGINOPTION 1 Serial expansion interface TTY and V.24 2 8 digital inputs/ 8 digital outputs 16 digital inputs 2 MOBYI, MOBY E SLG interface MOBYI file handler SLG interface MOBYL SLG interface PROFIBUS DP interface Figure 7-6 1 2 PLUGINOPTION 1 Connector 3 OPTION Connector 4 OPTION OPTION Accessories LCD display 2 x 24 characters LCD display 4 x 20 characters Keyboard with 29 lighted keys key-operated switch Sealed keyboard with 30 keys, 30 LEDs key-operated switch Clock chip MOBY I, MOBY E SLG interface MOBY I file handler SLG interface MOBY L SLG interface Barcode wand PROFIBUS DP interface Serial interface TTY and X.27 8 digital inputs/ 8 digital outputs 2 Configurator of ES 030-K Each plug-in option is a hardware module requiring one slot on the ES 030-K. The options "serial expansion interface" and "16 digital inputs" can also be led out on connector 2 as a special version. 7-16 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Accessories Ordering data Table 7-8 Ordering data for the ES 030-K Order No. ES 030-K acquisition station with TTY, X.27 serial interface on connector 1 8 DI + 8 DO on connector 2 6AW5 451- 3 Display without Display LCD 2 x 24 characters LCD 4 x 20 characters 0 1 2 Connector 3 Not used MOBY I, MOBY E interface 8 DI + 8 DO 16 DI MOBY I file handler MOBY L interface PROFIBUS DP interface1 serial interface (TTY, V.24) A C D E F L P S Connector 4 Not used Barcode (incl. wand) MOBY I, MOBY E interface MOBY I file handler MOBY L interface Barcode (without wand) PROFIBUS DP interface1 A B C F L N P Keyboard No keyboard Sealed keyboard, 30 keys, 30 LEDs Keyboard with 29 illuminated keys Loading kit for ES 030 1 0 2 3 6AW5 451-8AU Alternatively: preferably on connector 4. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 7-17 Accessories Technical data Table 7-9 Technical data of the ES 030-K Microprocessor 80C32 Clock pulse frequency 14.7 MHz M Memory capacity it off th the bbasic i unit it EEPROM 32 Kbytes = 16 K instructions RAM 128 Kbytes battery buffer for approx. 8 years (DB1-DB120) Command set (STEP5) Almost as for the SIMATIC 100U: e.g. logic instructions, storage operations, load and transfer operations, time and counting operations, comparison operations, and processing operations Display 2 x 24-character LCD or 4 x 20-character LCD Digital input/output Always present: Optional module: Optional module: Digital input Digital Di i l output 8 DI and 8 DO, DO isolated 8 DI and 8 DO, isolated 16 DI,and DI and 8 DO, DO isolated logical 0 0":: -2 2 to +2 V logical 1": 16 to 33 V logical1": (Ri = approx.5 k) Shared ggrounding g of all DI logical 1": +24 V I = 100 mA I = 50 mA Short-circuit Sh i i prooff Shared +24 V of all DO Serial interface (connector 1) Procedure Velocity Serial interface (Socket 3) Interface module 20 mA single current active/passive or V.24 procedure: run or 3964R Field bus PROFIBUS DP (slave) certified in accordance with part III of DIN 19245 Transmission speed 9.6 kbps to 1.5 Mbps C Connection i 99-pin i subminiature b i i D connector on connector 4 (optional on connector 3) Barcode interface (max. 2) can be connected MOBY E Connectable SLGs (max. of 2) 7-18 TTY or RS 485 3964R, run, SINEC L1 150 to 19200 bps Reading wand, wand swipe reader, reader hand-held laser scanner SLG 72 SLG 75 ANT 12 SLG 75 ANT 30 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Accessories Table 7-9 Technical data of the ES 030-K MOBY I Connectable SLGs (max. of 2) SLG 40/SLG 40-S SLG 41/SLG 41-S/SLG 41C SLG 42 SLG 43 SLG 44 MOBY L Connectable SLGs (max. of 2) SLG 52 Connection to SIMATIC S5 RS 485, V.24, TTY or SINEC L1 Keyboard Momentary-contact keyboard 29 keys, keys illuminated 1 key-operated switch Sealed keyboard 30 keys, 30 LEDs, 1 key-operated switch Power supply, normal Optional 230 V AC 10 %; 48-62 Hz 24 V DC (20-30 (20 30 V) Current consumption approx. 20 VA RAM/clock backup Backup battery for approx. 8 years Radio interference suppression Interference class B in accordance with VDE 0871 Protection rating g in accordance with EN 60529 IP54 Ambient A bi temperature During operation During transportation and storage 0 C to +40 C -40 40 C C to +70 C C Rel. air humidity up to 95% Housing Zinc die die-casting casting Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm Weight (approx.) 180 x 280 x 95 5 kg MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 7-19 Accessories ES 030-K ES 030-K Basic configuration with 8 DI/DO and serial interface, without display and without keyboard, for example, to control a point Basic configuration with 8 DI/DO and serial interface, with LCD and membrane keyboard and MOBY E, I or L for quality data Serial interface/RS422 Serial interface TTY MDS SIMATIC S5/CP544 MDS O0.1 MDS SLG SLG SLG ES 030-K ES 030-K (slave only) SIMATIC S5/S7 PC (master) PLC (master) D e.g. Station 11 P PROFIBUS DP L1 Station 120 Serial connection barcode scanner DI/DO Type2 Station 14 Serial connection barcode scanner Manual input Type3 L1 L1 DI/DO Manual input ES 030-K ES 030-K Basic configuration with 8 DI/DO and serial interface, with LCD and momentary-contact keys or membrane keyboard Basic configuration with serial interface (L1), with LCD display, sealed keyboard, barcode scanner pen L1 MOBY Iinterface Serial interface PC/PLC O0.1 I0.0 MDS TTY/RS485 O0.0 1234567 SLG Barcode Figure 7-7 7-20 Configuration example ES 030-K MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Documentation A Starting 10.01.2004, the technical documentation of MOBY is only available electronically on the "Software MOBY" CD with the order number 6GT2 080-2AA10. Technical descriptions Description ASM 400/401 (German/English) Description ASM 410 (German/English) Description ASM 450/FC 44 (German/English/French) Description FC 45 (German/English/French) Description ASM 470/FC 47 for SIMATIC S7 (German/English) Description ASM470/FB 47 for SIMATIC S5 (German/English) Description FB 240 (German/English) Description FB 250 for ASM 400/401 (German/English) Description 3964 R for Windows 95/NT (German/English) Description T3964R for DOS (German/English) Description MOBY API (German/English) Description C/C++-library CCT32 for Windows 95/NT (German/English) Operator control guides Operator control guide for STG MOBY hand-held terminal (English/ German) (also included with STG E) Programming instructions for STG MOBY hand-held terminal (English/ German) Manuals Equipment manual for ES 030-K (German/English) MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 A-1 Documentation A-2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 B Error Messages This chapter contains a list of MOBY I, E error messages. These messages are divided into three groups. B.1 Error numbers 01 hex to 1F hex are described in the first section. These messages are the same for all interfaces which use direct MDS addressing. B.2 Some function blocks (e.g., FB 250, FB 240 and FC 47) provide additional messages on the status of the hardware. These special messages are description in the second section. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 B-1 Error Messages B.1 General Errors The following error codes can occur during MOBY I, E operation. They are transferred in the status byte during telegram communication or via the red LED on the front plate. On most ASM modules, this LED always indicates the last error even when this error has already been corrected. On ASM 450, the error codes can also be optionally reported via PROFIBUS as device-related diagnoses. B-2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Error Messages Table B-1 General Errors Error Code in Hex LED Cause/Remedy 00 00 no error; result is ok - 01 See error code 0F 01 02 Presence error: MDS has moved out of the transmission window of the SLG. The MOBY command could only be executed partially. Read command: No data are supplied to the computer. Write command: The data memory which just left the field contains an incomplete data record. SIN1 0000 0003 Sa (working distance from SLG to MDS) not adhered to Configuration error: the data block to be processed is too large (in dynamic operation). The next command (READ, WRITE or NEXT) is automatically related to the next MDS. Note: The error display with the red LED on the front panel issues the error code 02 in this case. 02 02 Presence error. 0005 A mobile data memory has passed the SLG and was not processed with a command or concluded with the NEXT command. An INIT command was aborted with RESET. This error message cannot be transferred until the next command (read, write, status, RESET, DI/DO or NEXT). The command is not executed but causes this error message. The ASM executes the next command correctly again. Error 02 is reported immediately via external diagnosis. Note: The error output with the red error LED does not differentiate between error 01 and 02 (see error code 01). 03 03 Errors in the connection to the SLG Supply voltage of the ASM < 20 V or not connected 24 V power has dips Fuse on the ASM has blown Check wiring Cable wired incorrectly between the ASM and SLG or broken cable Defective hardware: ASM or SLG Other SLG active nearby 04 04 Error in memory of the MDS The data memory has never been write-accessed or has lost its contents due to a battery failure. Initialize data memory with the STG With the ASM: call the initialization command Check battery of MDS or change MDS (battery bit) Data memory is defective Initialization was executed with incorrect memory size 05 05 - Unknown command code in byte 2 of the telegram - MDS reports address error (check message frame) MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 0040 0041 0002/ 0004 B-3 Error Messages Table B-1 General Errors Error Code in Hex LED 06 06 Cause/Remedy Field interference on SLG The SLG is receiving interference pulses from its surroundings. SIN1 0044 External interference field. The interference field can be documented with the "inductive field indicator" of the STG! The distance between two SLGs is too small and does not adhere to the configuration guidelines! The connecting cable to the SLG is defective, too long or does not meet specifications. 07 07 Too many sending errors The MDS was unable to receive the command or the write data from the SLG even after several attempts. 0045 The MDS is positioned directly in the boundary area of the transmission window Data transmission to the MDS is being bothered by external interference. 08 08 CRC transmission error. - 0044 The monitoring circuit has detected an error during sending. Cause of error same as for error 06 - The MDS very often reports a CRC error The MDS is positioned in the tolerance range of the SLG The MDS and/or the SLG have a hardware defect 09 09 Only at initialization: CRC error when acknowledgment received by MDS - Cause of error same as for error 06 0A 10 Only at initialization: MDS cannot execute the INIT command - The MDS is defective. 0B 11 Only at initialization: timeout at initialization of the MDS - The MDS is positioned directly in the tolerance range of the transmission window The MDS is using too much current (defective). 0C 12 Memory of the MDS cannot be written. 0046 Memory of the MDS is defective. The EEPROM of the MDS was written too often and has reached the end of its life. An incorrect end address was parameterized with the INIT command 0D 13 Address error (address area exceeded) Specified address doesn't exist on the MDS. Check and correct command for message frame structure. The status byte in the command does not have the value 00 0E 14 ECC error The data cannot be read from the MDS. 0002/ 0004 0047 MDS data have been lost (MDS defective). The MDS was not initialized with ECC driver. Initialize MDS MDS with EEPROM has reached the end of its life. The data have been lost. Replace MDS. The MDS moved out of the field while being written. The MDS is positioned incorrectly. B-4 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Error Messages Table B-1 General Errors Error Code in Hex LED Cause/Remedy 0F 01 Startup message The ASM always sends this message after every startup. A startup is considered performed after operational voltage is applied, after the front switch is activated, after a reset via connector X1 or after a bus error. The startup message is retained until the user issues a RESET command to the ASM. This enables the user to recognize when voltage returns to the ASM (i.e. readiness for operation). 10 16 NEXT command is not possible or is not permitted. SIN1 1043 ASM working without presence check ASM has already received a NEXT command 11 17 Short circuit or overload of the 24 V outputs Next command must be a RESET command. The affected output is switched off All 24 V outputs are switched off when a total overload occurs Reset can only be performed by turning the power off and on again. 12 18 Internal ASM communication error The connection to the MOBY processor is defective. The next command must be a RESET command. Hardware of ASM defective EMC interference 14 20 Internal ASM error Stack overflow. The next command must be a RESET command. Turn 24 V power off and on again. 15 21 Incorrect operational parameter assignment Check the switch on the ASM 16 22 The command cannot be executed with the current bus configuration. Input or output areas are too small for the size of the message frame. Write or read command too long Adapt bus configuration on the master module. 17 23 Handshake error Next command must be a RESET command. The user has set an incorrect bit in the command byte of the message frame during the handshake process Check user program and correct. 18 24 Only RESET command permissible An error has occurred that must be acknowledged by a RESET command MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 B-5 Error Messages Table B-1 General Errors Error Code in Hex LED 19 25 Cause/Remedy Previous command active A new command was sent to the ASM although the last command is still active. SIN1 0042 An active command can only be terminated with a RESET command. The new command was terminated with error 19 hex and the old command is executed by the ASM and reported after processing as completed. 1A 26 PROFIBUS DP error occurred Bus connection interrupted (wire break, connector removed) Master won't address ASM anymore. Error reported as soon as the bus connection is working again 1E 30 - The message frame does not have the correct form. - QB byte does not correspond to user data length. - Check and correct the message frames in the user program. 1F 31 Communication with the MDS was terminated with RESET. This error can only be returned with a RESET command. - 20 (binary xx1x xxxx) 32 No error messages! Only occurs if you are working with the ECC driver turned on. It indicates that the driver has detected and corrected a 1 bit error. The read/write data are correct. 00522 40 (binary x1xx xxxx) 64 No error messages! This bit is normally always set. It is reserved for the status display of the 2nd 00512 80 (binary 1xxx xxxx) 128 No error message! Battery voltage of the MDS has fallen beneath the threshold value. We recommend you replace the MDS immediately! 00502 In MDS variants with EEPROM this status bit is always set. In SINUMERIK the battery message appears without the "F" identifier in the identification. The "fnr" field can be evaluated to detect a bad battery at a single point in the overall system. 1 2 SIN = equivalent error number in SIM in operating mode SINUMERIK If several statuses occur at the same time, the following order applies: 0052, 0050, 0051 B-6 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Error Messages B.2 ASM-specific error B.2.1 ASM 400 with FB 250 The messages listed in Table B-2 are displayed in data word 5 of FBDB. Table B-2 Error messages of FB 250 Error messages Bit 1 = "1": synchronization error Cause/Remedy The FB 250 has received the result for a command that is not (at this point) in the ZUWDB. The pointer (ZUW) may have been changed to ZUWDB while a command was active. As a result of EMC interference, the ASM processed a different command to the one programmed by the user. Check the whole SIMATIC system; check the grounding concept. Bit 2 = "1": FB 250 is synchronized (SYNCH) General communications option with a channel module of the ASM 400 module. This bit is set after a positive check of the FB parameter assignment. This occurs at the first RESET directly following the initial downloading of the programs and data blocks. If the RESET command does not work, the bit is not set or reset. ASM 400 module cannot be addressed by the FB. Incorrect address set on the ASM 400 ASM 400 defective RESET must always be initiated in the case of a reset synchronization bit Bit 4 = "1": parameter assignment error Bit 5 = "1": ASM error The "ADR" parameter does not contain the correct values. The "KAN" parameter is incorrectly specified. Permitted values are 1 or 2. The "TYP" parameter was incorrectly specified. Permitted values are 0, 1, 3, 5, 6. The "ANW" parameter is not "0" or "1" The command in ZUWDB is not allowed. The exact ASM error is in bit 8 to 15 of DISP If bit 8 to 15 = 0: After the command was transferred, the FB did not receive an acknowledgment from the ASM in time. After the command was started, FB 250 was not called by the user for longer than 4 seconds (no cyclical call of the FB). The user has changed data in the FBDB (DW 0 - DW 24) (specifically DW 0/1). MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 B-7 Error Messages Table B-2 Error messages of FB 250 Error messages Bit 6 = "1": timing error Cause/Remedy Monitoring by loop counter triggered in FB 250. The command data could not, or not completely, be transferred to the ASM 400. The ASM 400 cannot be addressed by the FB. It is possible that the "ADR" parameter does not correspond to the S3 switch position on the ASM 400. A length of 0 was transferred for a write command. The AG parameter is set incorrectly. The user has changed data in the FBDB (specifically DW 0/1) Check the ASM 400 hardware, addressing, parameter assignment, and user program Bit 7 = "1": repetition error The command to the ASM 400 was repeated Error in BEST = 0: After command repetition the command was terminated correctly (no error) Error in BEST = 1: There is a communication problem between the ASM and FB250. In spite of the fact that the command was repeated, it could not be processed correctly. If the repetition bit is set occasionally, all the hardware must be checked. Special attention should be paid to the grounding concept. Bit 8 to 12 Error message in accordance with Table B-1 Bit 13 = "1": ECC correction carried out Bit 14 = "1": Dialog battery under threshold value Bit 15 = "1": RAM battery under threshold value B-8 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Error Messages B.2.2 ASM 470 with FB 47/FC 47 The status word in the case of the FC 47 is DBB 6/7. The status word in the case of the FB 47 is DW 3. The MOBY errors are displayed in DBB 6 or DL 3 (see Table B-1). Internal errors of the function block are displayed in DBB 7 or DR 3 (see Table B-3). The red LED does not flash in the case of these error messages of FB 47/FC 47. The contents of the byte are specified as a hexadecimal number (HEX) and a fixed-point number (DEC). Table B-3 Error messages of FB 47/FC 47 DISP (right byte) 02 HEX/ 02 DEC Meaning An impermissible command code or command parameter was entered. Parameterize data words in BEDB correctly in accordance with the command description 06 HEX/ 06 DEC The command code and acknowledgment code received are not the same. 07 HEX/ 07 DEC Synchronization error in the execution of FB 47/FC 47 08 HEX/ 08 DEC The parameterized user data length of the read/write command and the received user data length of the acknowledgment are not the same. ASM 470 not correctly parameterized Internal runtime error BEDB is overwritten by other program sections Internal runtime error BEDB is overwritten by other program sections ASM 470 not correctly parameterized BEDB is overwritten by other program sections 09 HEX/ 09 DEC The user data received or written is too long. ASM 470 not correctly parameterized Read command: the specified length of the read data is too long (a maximum of 12 bytes is permissible) 0A HEX/ 10 DEC Read or written user data length too small. User data length is 0 bytes. Internal runtime error BEDB is overwritten by other program sections 11 HEX/ 17 DEC The formal operands of FB 47/FC 47 were parameterized incorrectly. Parameterize FB 47/FC 47 correctly Then start the RESET command MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 B-9 Error Messages Table B-3 Error messages of FB 47/FC 47 DISP (right byte) 13 HEX/ 19 DEC Meaning FB 47/FC 47 reports that only a RESET is permissible as the next command. A RESET was not carried out after a startup message of the ASM 470 A RESET was not carried out after an error message that requires a RESET as the next command Then start the RESET command 14 HEX/ 20 DEC Synchronization error between the ASM 470 and FB 47/FC 47. The handshake of the command and acknowledgment message frames is out of step. There may be a contact problem, or the supply voltage may be unstable. BEDB is overwritten by other program sections Then start the RESET command 15 HEX/ 21 DEC The ASM 470 has carried out a startup There may be a plug-in contact problem of the ASM 470 in the S7-300 1BH/ 27D1 The supply voltage of the ASM 470 is unstable Interference pulse BEDB is overwritten by other program sections Then start the RESET command The data field (number of user data bytes) between DAT-Z and the end of the DATDB (assuming DATDB consists of 256 data words, DW0 to DW255) is smaller than the length defined by the write command (DR4 in BEDB) DAT-Z must be adjusted to the user data length (make DAT-Z smaller) Reduce the length of the write/read data Then start the RESET command 1 B-10 Can only occur in the case of FB 47 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Error Messages B.2.3 ASM 450 with FB 240 The error displays (DISP) of FB 240 take place in data word DW 2 of BEDB: The MOBY errors are indicated in accordance with Table B-1 in the data word on the left (DL 2). FB-internal errors are indicated in the data word on the right (DR 2). The red LED does not flash in the case of these error messages of FB 240. The contents of the byte are specified as binary, a hexadecimal number (H), and a fixed-point number (D). Table B-4 Error messages of FB 240 DISP (right byte) 00000010 (02H/02D) Meaning An impermissible command code or command parameter was entered. Parameterize data words in BEDB correctly in accordance with the command description 00000110 (06H/06D) The command code and acknowledgment code received are not the same. Input and output area of the ASM 450 not parameterized adequately Parameterize the master module correctly 00000111/ (07H/07D) The length of the acknowledgment received is too large. Input and output area of the ASM 450 not parameterized adequately (not 32 bytes) Read command: the specified length of the data to be read is too large Parameterize the master module correctly 00001000 (08H/08D) The parameterized user data length of the read/write command with the received user data length of the acknowledgment is not identical. Input and output area of the ASM 450 not parameterized adequately Parameterize the master module correctly 00001001 (09H/09D) The user data received is too long. Input and output area of the ASM 450 not parameterized adequately (not 32 bytes) Read command: the specified length of the data to be read is too large Parameterize the master module correctly 00010001 (11H/17D) The formal operands of FB 240 were parameterized incorrectly, or the parameterization in the EPROM of the IM 308-B is incorrect. Parameterize FB 240 correctly Parameterize the master module correctly, and check the ADR parameter, in particular Then start the RESET command MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 B-11 Error Messages Table B-4 Error messages of FB 240 DISP (right byte) 00010011 (13H/19D) Meaning FB 240 reports that only a RESET is permissible as the next command. A RESET was not carried out after a startup message of the ASM 450 A RESET was not carried out after an error message that requires a RESET as the next command Then start the RESET command 00010100 (14H/20D) Synchronization error between the ASM 450 and FB 240. The handshake of the command and acknowledgment message frames is out of step. There may be a contact problem, or the supply voltage may be unstable. Then start the RESET command 00010101 (15H/21D) ASM 450 carried out a startup or there was a PROFIBUS DP bus fault. There may be a plug-in contact problem of the ASM 450 in the rack B-12 The supply voltage of the ASM 450 is unstable Interference pulse at the reset input of the base connector X1 PROFIBUS DP error occurred (e.g. bus connection interrupted) Then start the RESET command MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 ASCII Table MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 C C-1 ASCII Table C-2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 D Compatibility The following table contains a list of all the discontinued components in the MOBY E range for both customers and service personnel. You will also find these type designations on each component. You can use this table in particular to find replacements for models that have been discontinued. Table D-1 Type designation Compatibility of MOBY E components (as at July 2003) MLFB-No. SLG 70 ANT 0 6GT2 301-0AA00 Description/note Discontinued as of June 1, 2003 The replacement is compatible as regards its technical specifications. Replacement type MLFB-No. SLG 75 6GT2 398-1AF00 ANT 18 6GT2 398-1CA00 SLG 75 6GT2 398-1AF00 ANT 1 6GT2 398-1CB00 Difference: The antenna cable is 3 m long and can be plugged in at the side of the SLG. Note: The antenna is not included with the SLG 75. It must be ordered separately. SLG 70 ANT 1 6GT2 301-0AB00 Discontinued as of June 1, 2003 The replacement is compatible as regards its technical specifications. Difference: The antenna cable is 3 m long and can be plugged in at the side of the SLG. Note: The antenna is not included with the SLG 75. It must be ordered separately. MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 D-1 Compatibility D-2 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Index Numbers 6GT2 090-0HA00, 3-57 6GT2 090-0HB00, 6-94, 6-99, 6-104, 6-109, 7-9 3RX9 802-0AA0, 6-26 6GT2 090-0NA00, 6-6 6AW5 451-....3, 7-17 6GT2 090-0UA00, 3-63 6AW5 451-8AU, 7-17 6GT2 091-0FH.., 6-58 6ES5 491-0LB11, 6-12 6GT2 091-0FH20, 3-67, 3-70 6ES5 700-8MA11, 6-17 6GT2 091-0FH50, 3-67, 3-70 6ES5 700-8MA22, 6-17 6GT2 091-0A..., 3-64, 6-37, 6-39 6ES7 194-3AA00-0AA0, 6-58 6GT2 091-0AH50, 3-69 6ES7 194-3AA00-0BA0, 6-58 6GT2 091-0AN10, 3-69 6ES7 194-1AA01-0XA0, 6-26 6GT2 091-0AN20, 3-69 6ES7 194-1FC00-0XA0, 6-26 6GT2 091-0AN50, 3-69 6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0, 6-71 6GT2 091-0CH20, 3-70 6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0, 6-60, 6-61 6GT2 091-0CH50, 3-70 6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0, 6-60, 6-61 6GT2 091-0D..., 3-64, 6-24 6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0, 6-61, 6-66 6GT2 091-0DH50, 3-69 6ES7 972-0BA11-0XA0, 6-37, 6-39, 6-79 6GT2 091-0DN10, 3-69 6GK1 905-0CA00, 6-58 6GT2 091-0DN20, 3-69 6GK1 905-0CB00, 6-58 6GT2 091-0E..., 3-65, 6-60, 6-61, 6-66 6GK1 905-0DA10, 6-58 6GT2 091-0EH20, 3-69 6GK1 905-0EA00, 6-58 6GT2 091-0EH50, 3-69 6GK1 905-0EB00, 6-58 6GT2 091-0EN10, 3-69 6GK1 905-0EC00, 6-58 6GT2 091-0EN20, 3-69 6GK1 905-0FA00, 6-58 6GT2 091-0EN50, 3-69 6GK1 905-0FB00, 6-58 6GT2 091-1C..., 3-65 6GT2 002-0ED00, 6-58 6GT2 091-1CH20, 3-70, 6-26, 6-30, 6-70 6GT2 002-0AA00, 6-6 6GT2 091-1CH50, 3-70 6GT2 002-0AB00, 6-6 6GT2 091-1CN10, 3-70 6GT2 002-0BA00, 6-17 6GT2 091-1CN20, 3-70 6GT2 002-0EB00, 6-26 6GT2 091-1CN50, 3-70 6GT2 002-0EB20, 6-26 6GT2 091-2A..., 3-64 6GT2 002-0FA10, 6-61 6GT2 091-2AN10, 3-69 6GT2 002-0GA10, 6-61 6GT2 091-2AN50, 3-69 6GT2 002-0HA10, 6-70 6GT2 091-2C..., 3-65 6GT2 002-2CE00, 6-37 6GT2 091-2CH20, 3-70 6GT2 002-2EE00, 6-37 6GT2 091-2D..., 3-64 6GT2 080-2AA10, 6-6, 6-26, 6-37, 6-61, 6-70, 7-4 6GT2 091-2DH50, 3-69 6GT2 090-0A..., 3-58, 6-30, 6-95 6GT2 091-2E..., 3-65 6GT2 090-0AN50, 3-71 6GT2 091-2EH20, 3-69 6GT2 090-0AT12, 3-71 6GT2 091-2EH50, 3-69 6GT2 090-0AT80, 3-71 6GT2 091-2EN10, 3-69 6GT2 090-0BA00, 3-63 6GT2 091-2EN50, 3-69 6GT2 090-0BA10, 3-63 6GT2 094-0AB00, 7-13 6GT2 090-0BB00, 6-6 6GT2 190-0AA00, 4-8, 4-10 6GT2 090-0BB10, 6-6 6GT2 190-0AB00, 4-8, 4-10 6GT2 090-0BC00, 6-26, 6-30, 6-70 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Index-1 Index 6GT2 300-0AA00, 4-4 6GT2 300-0BB00, 4-8 6GT2 300-0CD00, 4-12 6GT2 300-0CE00, 4-17 6GT2 301-0AA00, D-1 6GT2 301-0AB00, D-1 6GT2 301-0CA00, 5-3 6GT2 301-2BB00, 5-24, 6-79 6GT2 302-2CE00, 6-79 6GT2 302-2EE00, 6-79 6GT2 303-0AA00, 7-13 6GT2 303-1AA00, 7-13 6GT2 303-1CA00, 7-13 6GT2 303-1DA00, 7-13 6GT2 305-0AA00, 6-99 6GT2 305-0AB00, 6-104 6GT2 305-0CA00, 6-109 6GT2 381-1AB00, 7-13 6GT2 390-0AA00, 4-4, 4-6 6GT2 390-0BA00, 6-37, 6-79 6GT2 390-1AA00, 6-99, 6-104, 6-109 6GT2 390-1AB00, 3-62, 6-37, 6-79 6GT2 391-0B..., 6-37, 6-39, 6-79 6GT2 391-0BH50, 3-66, 3-70 6GT2 391-0BN20, 3-66, 3-70 6GT2 391-1AH50, 3-66, 3-70, 5-24, 6-78, 6-79 6GT2 391-1BN10, 3-67, 3-70, 6-79 6GT2 391-1BN25, 3-67, 3-70, 5-24, 6-79 6GT2 391-1DH50, 3-68, 3-70, 6-94, 6-99, 6-104, 6-109, 7-9 6GT2 398-1AF00, 5-9, D-1 6GT2 398-1CA00, 5-9, D-1 6GT2 398-1CB00, 5-9, D-1 6GT2 398-1CC00, 5-9 6GT2 398-1CD00, 5-9 6GT2 398-1CE00, 5-9 6GT2 398-1CE00-0AX0, 5-9 6GT2 491-1HH50, 3-70, 6-37, 6-39, 6-78, 6-79, 7-5 6GT2 494-0AA00, 3-59, 6-37, 6-78, 6-79, 7-5 6GT2 891-0F..., 3-67, 6-58 6GT2 891-0FH20, 3-70 6GT2 891-0FH50, 3-70 6GT2 891-0FN10, 3-70 6GT2 891-0FN20, 3-70 6GT2 891-0FN50, 3-70 6VX1 830-0EH10, 6-58 6XV1 822-5B..., 6-58 6XV1 830-3D..., 6-58 Index-2 6XV1 830-7AH10, 6-58 6XV1 830-7B..., 6-58 A Acquisition station ES 030-K features/layout, 7-15 ordering data, 7-17 technical data, 7-18 Adapter floor plate for top-hat rail mounting, 6-41, 6-85 Amount of data, transmitted based on MDS speed, 3-14 ASM 400 address settings, 6-10 configuration and functions, 6-4 connectors and their assignment, 6-9 function block FB 250, 6-8 ordering data, 6-6 settings on the channel module, 6-11 SIMATIC S5 configuration, 6-12 switches and plug-in jumpers, 6-10 technical data, 6-7 ASM 410 configuration in ET 100U/200U, 6-20 layout and function, 6-16 ordering data, 6-17 setting the operating mode, 6-22 slots in the PLC, 6-19 technical data, 6-18 wiring of one or two SLGs, 6-24 ASM 424 adapter floor plate for top-hat rail mounting, 6-41 configuration and function, 6-36 dimensions, 6-41 ordering data, 6-37 pin assignment and switches, 6-40 technical data, 6-38 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Index ASM 450 configuration and function, 6-25 dimensions, 6-32 ordering data, 6-26 pin assignments, 6-33 PROFIBUS address and terminating resistor, 6-35 PROFIBUS configuration, 6-29 SLG connection method, 6-29 technical data, 6-27 ASM 452 configuration and function, 6-26 dimensions, 6-32 ordering data, 6-26 pin assignments, 6-33 PROFIBUS address and terminating resistor, 6-35 PROFIBUS configuration, 6-29 SLG connection method, 6-29 technical data, 6-27 ASM 454 adapter floor plate for top-hat rail mounting, 6-41 configuration and function, 6-36 dimensions, 6-41 ordering data, 6-37 pin assignment and switches, 6-40 technical data, 6-38 ASM 456 configuration, 6-45 design, 6-44 diagnosis using LEDs, 6-54 dimensions, 6-57 function, 6-42 ordering data, 6-58 setting the PROFIBUS address, 6-46 SLG connection technique, 6-52 technical data, 6-56 wiring, 6-49 ASM 470 configuration and function, 6-59 installation of the software, 6-67 ordering data, 6-61 technical data, 6-62 wiring to the SLG, 6-66 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 ASM 473 configuration, 6-72 configuration and function, 6-69 dimensions, 6-76 hardware configuration, 6-74 ordering data, 6-70 pin assignments, 6-75 SLG connection method, 6-74 technical data, 6-70 ASM 475 configuration and function, 6-60 installation of the software, 6-67 ordering data, 6-61 technical data, 6-62 wiring to the SLG, 6-66 ASM 724 adapter floor plate for top-hat rail mounting, 6-85 dimensions, 6-85 dynamic operation, 6-81 ordering data, 6-79 pin assignment and switches, 6-83 technical data, 6-80 ASM 754 adapter floor plate for top-hat rail mounting, 6-85 dimensions, 6-85 dynamic operation, 6-81 ordering data, 6-79 pin assignment and switches, 6-83 technical data, 6-80 B Basic rules on EMC, 3-53 C C-library CCT32, 7-4 MOBY API, 7-4 Cable configuration, 3-58 Cable lengths, 3-69 Cables, shielding of, 3-51 Index-3 Index CCT32, 7-4 Chemical resistance of the mobile data memories, 3-37 Communication between ASM and user program, 3-8 between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS, 3-7 Concept of shielding, 3-55 Connecting cables, 3-64 Connector assignment, 3-60 D Data structure of the MOBY E data memory with SIM, 6-87 Documentation Manuals, A-1 Operator control guides, A-1 Technical descriptions, A-1 E EMC guidelines, 3-40 Equipotential bonding, 3-49 F Field data, 3-11, 6-89 L LEDs for MOBY, 6-75 LEDs for PROFIBUS DP, 6-75 M MDS E600 dimensions, 4-6 field data, 4-5 metal-free space, 4-7 ordering data, 4-4 technical data, 4-4 MDS E611 dimensions, 4-9 field data, 4-9 metal-free space, 4-11 ordering data, 4-8 technical data, 4-8 Index-4 MDS E623 field data, 4-13 metal-free space, 4-14 mounting, 4-15 ordering data, 4-12 technical data, 4-12 MDS E624 dimensions, 4-18 field data, 4-18 metal-free space, 4-19 ordering data, 4-17 technical data, 4-17 Metal-free area, 3-20 flush mounting of MDS in metal, 3-20 flush mounting of SLG/SLA in metal, 3-26 Metal-free space, mounting the MDS on metal, 3-20 MOBY Software, 7-2 ordering data, 7-4 MOBY STG E hand-held terminal ordering data, 7-13 system prerequisites, 7-11 MOBY wide-range power supply dimensions, 7-7 ordering data, 7-5 technical data, 7-5 MOBY wide-range power supply unit, connector pin assignment 24 V output, 7-6 MOBY API, 7-4 MOBY STG E hand-held terminal hardware, 7-12 setup and function, 7-10 technical data, 7-13 O Ordering data, SLG connector, 3-62 R Round cores, 5-23 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 Index S SIM 70 ANT 0 definition of distance D, 6-102 dimensions, 6-102 metal-free space, 6-103 ordering data, 6-99 technical data, 6-99 transmission window, 6-103 SIM 70 ANT 1 definition of distance D, 6-108 dimensions, 6-108 metal-free space, 6-107 ordering data, 6-104 technical data, 6-104 transmission window, 6-106 SIM 72 definition of distance D, 6-113 dimensions, 6-113 metal-free space, 6-112 ordering data, 6-109 technical data, 6-109 transmission window, 6-111 SLA 71 definition of distance D, 5-27 dimensions, 5-27 field data, 5-25 metal-free space, 5-26 ordering data, 5-24 technical data, 5-24 transmission window, 5-26 SLG 72 definition of distance D, 5-6 dimensions, 5-6 field data, 5-4 metal-free space, 5-5 ordering data, 5-3 technical data, 5-3 transmission window, 5-5 SLG 75 ANT 1 definition of distance D, 5-18 dimensions, 5-20 field data, 5-12 metal-free space, 5-15 ordering data, 5-9 technical data, 5-10 transmission window, 5-13 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 SLG 75 ANT 4 definition of distance D, 5-18 dimensions, 5-20 field data, 5-12 metal-free space, 5-15 ordering data, 5-9 technical data, 5-10 transmission window, 5-13 SLG 75 ANT 12 definition of distance D, 5-18 dimensions, 5-20 field data, 5-12 metal-free space, 5-15 ordering data, 5-9 technical data, 5-10 transmission window, 5-13 SLG 75 ANT 18 definition of distance D, 5-18 dimensions, 5-20 field data, 5-12 metal-free space, 5-15 ordering data, 5-9 technical data, 5-10 transmission window, 5-13 SLG 75 ANT 30 definition of distance D, 5-18 dimensions, 5-20 field data, 5-12 metal-free space, 5-15 ordering data, 5-9 technical data, 5-10 transmission window, 5-13 SLG connector, ordering data, 3-63 Split toroidal cores, 5-22 Supplementary power pack for SLG, 3-59 T Transmission window, 3-3 effects of metal, 3-28 reduction of metallic effects, 3-34 Transmit period of the MDS, 3-6 W Wide-range connector power pack ordering data, 7-9 technical data, 7-8 Index-5 Index Index-6 MOBY E Configuration, Installation and Service Manual (4)J31069-D0105-U001-A7-7618 TO: Siemens AG A&D SE EWF MS PO Box 2355 D-90713 Fuerth FROM: Your name: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Your title: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Your company: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Street: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ City: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Telephone:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Please tick your branch. r Automotive industry r Pharmaceutics industry r Chemical industry r Plastics processing r Electrical industry r Paper industry r Foodstuffs r Textiles industry r Process control technology r Transportation industry r Mechanical engineering r Other _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ r Petrochemistry Remarks/Suggestions Your remarks and suggestions help us to improve the quality of our documentation. Please complete this questionnaire as soon as you have time, and return it to Siemens. Title of your manual:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Order number of your manual:_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Please enter your personal evaluation from 1 (good) to 5 (poor). 1. Do the contents of this manual meet your requirements ? 2. Is it easy to find the information you need ? 3. Is the information written in an easy-to-understand manner ? 4. Does the amount of technical detail meet your requirements ? 5. What is your opinion of the figures and tables ? If you encountered concrete problems, please use this space to explain. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _